R5976166_10_userguide

D-Cine Communicator
User Guide
Post Production Edition
R9806070
R5976166/10
11/04/2006
Barco Inc. - USA
3240 Town Point Drive, Kennesaw, GA 30144
Phone: (770) 218-3200
Fax: (770) 218-3250
E-mail: sales.us.bps@barco.com
Visit us at the web: www.barco.com
Barco nv Digital Cinema
Noordlaan 5, B-8520 Kuurne
Phone: +32 56.36.84.93
Fax: +32 56.36.88.62
E-mail: info.bdc.bps@barco.com
Visit us at the web: www.barco.com
Printed in Belgium
Changes
Barco provides this manual ’as is’ without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including but not
limited to the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Barco may make im-
provements and/or changes to the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time
without notice.
This publication could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information in this publication; these changes are incorporated in new editions of this publication.
Copyright ©
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced or translated. It shall not otherwise
be recorded, transmitted or stored in a retrieval system without the prior written consent of Barco.
Trademarks
Brand and product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks, registered trademarks or copyrights
of their respective holders. All brand and product names mentioned in this manual serve as comments or
examples and are not to be understood as advertising for the products or their manufactures.
Software License Agreement

You should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using this software. Your use of this soft-
ware indicates your acceptance of this license agreement and warranty.
Terms and Conditions
1. 1. No redistribution of the D-Cine Communicator is allowed.
2. 2. Reverse-Engineering. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or alter anyhow this soft-
ware product.
Disclaimer of Warranty
THIS SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING FILES ARE SOLD "AS IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTIES AS
TO PERFORMANCE OR MERCHANTABILITY OR ANY OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED. IN NO EVENT SHALL BARCO BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGE OF ANY KIND, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY. ANY LIABILITY OF THE SELLER WILL BE EXCLUSIVELY LIMITED TO REPLACEMENT OF
THE PRODUCT OR REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE.
GNU-GPL code
If you would like a copy of the GPL source code contained in this product shipped to you on CD, please contact
service.cinema@barco.com . The cost of preparing and mailing a CD will be charged.
Table of contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction .........................................................................................9
1.1 General Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2. Software Installation and Start up ........................................................... 11
2.1 Required Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2 Installing the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3 Upgrading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4 Getting access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.5 Registration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.6 Removing the D-Cine Communicator software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.7 Start up of the D-Cine Communicator via a batch file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. Projector Connection ........................................................................... 17
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2.1 Hardware connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2.2 Ethernet Connection via entering an IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.2.3 Ethernet connection via short cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3 Serial Port Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.3.1 Serial Connection to RS232/422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.3.2 Serial Connection to Loop In / Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3.3 Modem Dial Up connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.4 Disconnection from the D-Cine Premiere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.5 Changing the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.6 Reset Projector Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4. Projector Setup ................................................................................... 33
4.1 Control Interface set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.2 Pattern Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.3 Execute Quickly a MacroSet up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.4 Activate Projector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.5 Activate Projector Screen Set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.6 Macro Shortcuts for DP30 and DP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.7 Input and Source set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.7.1 Source Selection for DP30 and DP50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.7.2 Source Selection for DP100 and DP90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.7.2.1 Cine Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.7.2.2 ACSAR 2 source selection start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.7.3 About DVI standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.7.4 Active Area Selection & Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.8 Output and Screen set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.8.1 Lamp ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.8.2 Image Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.8.3 Lens Type selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.8.4 Anamorphic Lens holder calibration for DP100 and DP90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.8.5 Resizing the image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.8.5.1 What is Resizing?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.8.5.2 Resizing with the arrow keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.8.5.3 Resizing with direct user input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.8.5.4 Letterbox function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.8.6 Masking the image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.8.6.1 What is masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.8.6.2 Masking via the arrow keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.8.6.3 Masking with direct user input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.8.7 Saving Screen Settings while Resizing or Masking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.8.8 Dowser Open or Close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.8.9 Constant Light Output for DP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 1

Table of contents
4.8.9.1 Start up of the CLO functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

4.8.9.2 Read out the light output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.8.9.3 Calibrating CLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.8.10 Light Output and Calibration for DP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.8.10.2 Target set up for Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.8.10.3 Target set up for CLO Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.8.10.4 Light output Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.8.11 Light Output and Calibration for DP100-DP90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.8.11.2 Target set up for Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.8.11.3 Target set up for CLO Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.8.11.4 Light output Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.9 Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.9.1 Advanced Source settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.9.1.1 Start up of the advanced source settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.9.1.2 SMPTE Field bit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.9.1.3 SMPTE 291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.9.1.4 3 - 2 pull down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.9.1.5 Re-synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.9.1.6 Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.9.2 Advanced Image settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.9.2.1 Start up of the advanced image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.9.2.2 Anti log Lut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.9.2.3 De-Gamma Lut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.9.2.4 3D lookup table (complex Lut). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.9.2.5 Image Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.9.3 Advanced 3D Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.9.3.1 About 3D projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.9.3.2 Start up of the advanced 3D settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.9.3.3 Frame rate multiplication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.9.3.4 3D Test pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.9.3.5 3D Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.9.4 Image Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.10 Function keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5. Projector Configuration .......................................................................101
5.1 Set up of the Internal Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.2 Set up of the Serial Bus Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.3 Set up of the Network Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.3.1 Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.3.2 Assign a hostname to the projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.3.3 Assign an Ethernet address via DHCP for the TI boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.4 Manually assign an Ethernet address for the TI boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.3.5 Assign an Ethernet address via DHCP for the Barco controller (only for DP100-DP90). . . . . . . 109
5.3.6 Manually assign an Ethernet address for the Barco controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
5.4 OPTO-Isolated GPI Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
5.5 Controller Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
5.5.1 Configuring Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
5.5.2 Read out of the serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
5.5.3 Entering a SNMP key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
5.5.4 SNMP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
5.5.5 Entering a CLO key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
5.5.6 Lens Motor Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
5.6 Lamp Run Time Configuration for DP50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
5.7 Lamp Settings for DP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.8 Lamp Settings for DP100-DP90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6. PCF Editor ........................................................................................123
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

Table of contents
6.1.1 PCF file content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

6.1.2 PCF editor modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.1.3 Use of the PCF editor in online mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.1.4 Use of the PCF editor in offline mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.1.5 How to start editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.1.5.1 Starting from a new file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.1.5.2 Starting from a existing PCF file on PC or projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.1.6 The use of the sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.1.6.1 How to change the value of one color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.1.6.2 Changing the 3 color values simultaneously. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.1.6.3 Bringing the 3 color values to the same level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.2 Active Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.2.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.2.2 Loading from a separate file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.2.3 Active Area setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.2.4 Saving the actual setting to a separate file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.3 Anti Log Lookup Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.3.3 Adjusting the actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.3.4 Saving the actual settings to a separate file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.4 Color Space Convertor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.4.3 Entering color space convertor matrix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.4.4 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.4.4.1 Overview of the different settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.4.4.2 Possible adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.5 3D Lookup Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.6 Gamma Lookup Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.6.2 Creating you own gamma table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.6.3 Import Gamma table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.6.4 Loading a gamma curve from a separate file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.6.5 Adjusting the actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.7 Target Color Gamut (P7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6.7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6.7.2 Color selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.7.3 Color coordinate of a point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
6.7.4 Gain (luminance) of a color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.7.5 White point adjustment in Normal mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6.7.6 White Point Tolerance Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6.7.7 White Clipping Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6.7.8 Adding a Remark or Copyright notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7. Projector Tests ...................................................................................159
7.1 General Purpose Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
7.2 Ethernet test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
7.3 Test Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.3.1 Changing a test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.3.2 Clear the projected test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.4 Port 292 error counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.5 Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.5.1 Start up of the self tests setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.5.2 Self tests choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Table of contents
8. Color Calibration ................................................................................167

8.1 Introduction to Color Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.2 Color Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.2.1 Color Correction Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.2.2 Color Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.2.3 Installing a Target Color Gamut file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.2.4 Verifying the colors after correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
9. File Manager ......................................................................................173
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9.2 Internal file system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9.2.1 Changing the view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
9.2.2 Renaming files and folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
9.2.3 Deleting files and directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
9.2.4 Creating a new folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
9.2.5 Navigation through folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
9.2.6 Changing the attribute setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
9.3 File Upload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
9.4 File Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
9.5 Actions on Projector files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
9.5.1 Save from ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
9.5.2 Select ACTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9.5.3 Write ACTIVE Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
9.5.4 Read from ACTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9.5.5 Read Files Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.5.6 Executing a Macro file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
9.6 Backup the file system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9.7 Restore the file system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
10.Updates ...........................................................................................195
10.1 General overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
10.2 General Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
10.3 Other individual upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10.3.1 Loading setting in the Button module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10.3.2 Upgrading the Touch panel menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10.3.3 Controller Software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
10.4 Upgrade Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
10.4.1 Connection broken, projector reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
10.4.2 Connection broken while updating Button control or touch panel software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
11.Security Management .........................................................................205
11.1 Security management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
11.2 Starting up the Security management with valid key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
11.3 Adding an extra key to the list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
11.4 Changing the pin code of an existing key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
11.5 Get an overview of the Card Cage access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12.Automation .......................................................................................209
12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
12.2 Creating an Action List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
13.Automation for DP100 and DP90 ...........................................................213
13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
13.2 Activating a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
13.3 Macro association. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
13.4 Edit a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
14.Server .............................................................................................219
14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
14.2 Server overview interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
14.3 Time Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Table of contents
14.3.1 Time source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

14.3.2 Input frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
14.3.3 Timeline stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
14.3.4 Timeline adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
14.3.5 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
14.4 Subtitle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
14.4.1 Steps to be taken for subtitle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
14.4.2 Subtitle server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
14.4.3 Subtitle file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
14.4.4 Time to live (TTL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
14.4.5 Subtitle Control activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
14.5 Metadata Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
14.5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
14.5.2 Steps to be taken for metadata control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
14.5.3 Metadata server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
14.5.4 Metadata file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
14.5.5 Time to live (TTL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
14.5.6 Metadata Control activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
15.Projector Status for DP50 ....................................................................231
15.2 Status overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
15.2.1 Switch Mode Power Supply status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
15.2.2 Fan/Tec Controller status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
15.2.3 Boards Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
15.2.4 External Cooler Unit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
15.2.5 CLO status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
15.2.6 Security Card Cage Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
15.2.7 Barco access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
15.3 Projector Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
15.3.1 Displaying Projector Log Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
15.3.2 Saving the Projector Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
15.3.3 Refreshing the Projector log information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
15.3.4 Clearing the Projector log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
15.3.5 Active Cooling on DMD’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
15.4 Security log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
15.5 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
16.Projector Status for DP30 ....................................................................241
16.2.1 Switch Mode Power Supply status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
16.2.2 Lamp Power Supply status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
16.2.3 DCDC Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
16.2.4 Board status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
16.2.5 CLO status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
16.2.6 Security Card Cage Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
16.2.7 Lens Motor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
16.2.8 Lens Info Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
16.2.9 Barco access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
16.3 Projector Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
16.3.1 Displaying Projector Log Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
16.3.2 Saving the Projector Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
16.3.3 Refreshing the Projector log information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
16.3.4 Clearing the Projector log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
16.4 Security log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
16.5 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
17.Projector Status for DP100-DP90 ...........................................................251
17.1 General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Table of contents

17.2.1 Voltage statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
17.2.2 Temperature statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
17.2.3 Fan statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
17.2.4 Other projector properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
17.2.5 Projector Log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
17.2.6 Security log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
17.3 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
18.Version Info ......................................................................................263
18.1 Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
19.Macro Editor .....................................................................................265
19.1 Create a new Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
19.2 Save a Macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
19.3 Edit a Macro file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
19.3.1 Selecting a Macro file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
19.3.2 Delete a command out of a macro file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
19.3.3 Add commands to a macro file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
19.3.4 Change the order of the Macro commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
19.4 Edit the attributes (values) of the items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
19.4.1 Input Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
19.4.1.1 Select input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
19.4.1.2 Select input path (only for DP100-DP90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
19.4.1.3 Processing path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
19.4.1.4 SMPTE292 packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
19.4.1.5 SMPTE 292 dual packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
19.4.1.6 DVI packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
19.4.1.7 DVI Dual packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
19.4.2 Preset files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
19.4.2.1 Activate PCF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
19.4.2.2 Activate SCREEN file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
19.4.2.3 Activate EXTRA file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
19.4.2.4 Activate MCGD file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
19.4.2.5 Activate ACSAR 2 layout file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
19.4.2.6 Activate ACSAR 2 Input file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
19.4.2.7 Auto load ACSAR2 input file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
19.4.3 Test pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
19.4.3.1 Enable test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
19.4.3.2 Disable test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
19.4.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
19.4.4.1 Lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
19.4.4.2 Dowser control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
19.4.4.3 Set the execution delay for a ’blank image’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
19.4.4.4 Set the execution delay for a ’deblank image output’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
19.4.5 ACSAR2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
19.4.5.1 Input mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
19.4.5.2 Input Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
19.4.6 Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
19.4.6.1 GPO control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
19.4.7 Error handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
19.4.7.1 Error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
20.D-Cine Communicator Log information ...................................................293
20.1 Log information window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
21.Help Function ...................................................................................295
21.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
21.2 Using help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Table of contents
22.ACSAR 2 ..........................................................................................297
22.1 General introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
22.2 Create a new layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
22.3 Edit an existing layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
22.4 Renaming a layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
22.5 Deleting a layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
22.6 Windowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
22.6.1 Window selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
22.6.2 Enabling or disabling a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
22.6.3 Moving Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
22.6.4 Scaling Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
22.6.5 Z-order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
22.6.6 Full size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
22.6.7 Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
22.7 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
22.7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
22.7.2 Load a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
22.7.3 Save a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
22.7.4 Save all file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
22.7.5 Rename a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
22.7.6 Delete a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
22.7.7 Auto Load Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
22.7.8 Image Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
22.7.9 Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
22.8 Input slot configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
22.9 Input locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
A. Updating TI boards..............................................................................319
A.1 Installation of the Update Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
A.2 Start up the update program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
A.3 Make a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
A.3.1 Type of connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
A.3.2 Serial connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
A.3.3 Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
A.4 Installation of the new software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
A.5 Logging of the operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
A.6 Special functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
A.7 Factory Install Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
A.8 Recovery option - Stay in Boot option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
B. Appendix : File formats used by the D-Cine Premiere..................................333
B.1 Projector Configuration File (PCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
B.2 Active Area - Source Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
B.3 Anti Log Lookup Table file (LUT-AL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
B.4 Color Space Converter File (CSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
B.5 3D Lookup Table (LUT-CLUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
B.6 De Gamma Lookup Table (LUT-DG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
B.7 Target Color Gamut Data File (TCGD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
B.8 Test Pattern TGA™ File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Glossary...............................................................................................345
Index ...................................................................................................349
List of images ........................................................................................357

Table of contents

1. Introduction
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 General Introduction

D-Cine Premiere configuration tool
A uniquely powerful and easy to use configuration program for the Barco D-Cine Premiere projector,
D-Cine Communicator provides all of the tools necessary for the total projector set-up and control. A com-
prehensive array of easy to access menu pages provide control of the D-Cine Premiere’s digital input,
output and screen display via a combination of simple buttons and WYSIWYG displays.
Quick and Easy configuration

Via clearly indicated tab pages for control of Projector Connection, Configuration, Test, Color Calibration,
File Management, and configuration with your existing Automation system.
Total Control
Of the Projector Input selection, alignment and switching; Screen Display output, including Lens type se-
lection, Sizing , Masking and Barco’s unique CLO (Constant Light Output) calibration
… And Total Security

With extensive projector Status indication, Lamp run-time register, Factory or User Definable projector
back-up settings, Security Key settings control … plus a comprehensive Help File.
About this manual

This User Guide provides detailed information about the D-Cine Communicator features. This guide is
designed to be a reference tool in your everyday work with the D-Cine Communicator.
The following icons are used in the manual :
Caution
Warning
Info, term definition. General info about the term.
Note, gives extra information about the described subject.
Tip, gives extra advice about the described subject.
Typography:
• Clickable menu items or buttons are indicated in bold, e.g. Open
• A menu window is indicated in italic, e.g. Measure CLO.
• Step related notes, tips, warnings or cautions are printed in italic.
• Procedure related notes, tips, warnings or cautions are printed in bold between 2 lines preceding by
the corresponding icon.

1. Introduction

2. Software Installation and Start up
2. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND START

UP
2.1 Required Configuration

PC requirements
• Windows 2000, Windows XP and WinME
• 266 MHz, 64 MB Ram
• Minimum disk space : 50 MB
• Minimum Screen resolution: 1024 x 768
2.2 Installing the Software

How to install
1. Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Is the AutoPlay active on your PC.
If yes, go to step 6
If no, from within the Windows environment go to the Start Menu. Choose Run... from the menu and
proceed with the next steps.
3. Open windows explorer.
4. Select the CD-ROM drive.
5. Double click ’setup.exe’ file.
6. Press OK to run the installation.
Follow the instruction of the Installation shield.
7. The setup program will ask you for to specify an install directory. You can accept the default location or
browse to a specific directory. Click NEXT.
Theatre Edition C:\Program Files\BARCO\D-CineCommunicatorTheatre

Engineering Edition C:\Program Files\BARCO\D-CineCommunicatorEngineering
Post Production Edition C:\Program Files\BARCO\D-CineCommunicatorPostProd
8. Read the Licence agreement and click Yes to continue the installation. (image 2-1)
The program will be installed on the PC system and the user will be prompted to ask a icon will be
placed on the desktop .

Image 2-1
Licence agreement
2.3 Upgrading the Software

How to update
1. Download or copy the update zip file locally.
2. Unzip the update file in the communicator install directory..
3. Run Setup.exe.
The windows install shield opens.
4. Click on Next to continue.
The install shield check the PC for an old version of the D-Cine Communicator software.
A selection window will be displayed. (image 2-2)
5. Select the radio button in front of Upgrade Software to version xxxx.
6. Click no Next.
The actual version on the PC will be replaced by the new one.

Image 2-2
Install selection window
If you were previously issued licensing key, this key will be valid for this version.
If upgrading the D-Cine Communicator software from versions lower than 1.2.0 to 1.2.0
or higher, the default folder where the software is installed has been changed. Any exist-
ing license files (communicator.lc) need to be copied manually to the new communicator
folder. The D-Cine Communicator, Theatre version is free of license.
See D-Cine Communicator release notes to find out the differences with previous ver-
sions.
2.4 Getting access

To start up
1. Click on the D-Cine Communicator icon.
The program starts up. (image 2-3)
2. Enter your password.
The default password is premiere.
3. Click OK to enter the software.
Only for Post Production and Engineering version, when it is the first start up, the D-Cine Communicator
will run in a non registered mode for 30 days. The user will be warned by several messages. (image 2-4)
The software starts up with the Projector Connection window.

Image 2-3
Logon screen
Image 2-4
Register warning
It is strongly recommended to change your password after the first logon.
2.5 Registration procedure

Registration
At the first start up of the D-Cine Communicator software a register.dat file is created in the directory where
the software is installed.
How to register
1. Send the register.dat file to your local supplier.
Or,
Open the register.dat file in your favorite editor and write down the serial number which has to be sent
to your local supplier.
2. Your local supplier will sent a communicator.lc file back.

3. Copy this communicator.lc file into the directory where the software is installed.
4. Restart the D-Cine Communicator software.
Your version is registered.
2.6 Removing the D-Cine Communicator software

How to remove
1. Run Setup.exe.
The windows install shield opens.
2. Click on Next to continue.
A selection window will be displayed (image 2-2).
3. Select the radio button in front of Delete the current installed software.
4. Click on Next.
The software will be removed from the PC.
2.7 Start up of the D-Cine Communicator via a batch file

How to start up
1. Create a batch file to start up the D-Cine Communicator by entering the exe file in the batch file.
drive letter:\installation path\D-Cine Communicator_exe_file -arguments
The communicator can be started with arguments
Argument Description
-ac autoconnect to given IP address
IPaddress
-gt tabname goto the given tab page
-np connect without password
Example : to view immediately the status pages with the Post production version of the D-Cine Com-
municator (for the other versions, fill out the appropriate exe file.):
Installation path\DCineCommunicatorPP.exe -gt Status


3. Projector Connection
3. PROJECTOR CONNECTION
3.1 Introduction
Overview
The D-Cine Communicator can be connected to the D-Cine Premiere in one of following ways:
• Via an Ethernet connection
• Via a serial connection
Note when connecting to the D-Cine Premiere

When metadata control is enabled on this projector, the following message will be displayed while con-
necting.
Image 3-1
Metadata enabled message
During this session, executing macros and activating PCF files will not work as expected. To switch off
metadata control automatically, click Yes. If not, click no, cancel this action.
3.2 Ethernet Connection

Overview
• Hardware connection
• Ethernet Connection via entering an IP address
• Ethernet connection via short cuts
3.2.1 Hardware connection

Possibilities
Two Ethernet connection are possible at the same time:
• Primary
• Secondary
Use the primary connection as default to connect the D-Cine Communicator to the D-Cine Premiere.
If another device or another D-Cine Communicator is already connected to the D-Cine Premiere, use the
secondary connection to connect.

Image 3-2
Physical indication of Ethernet connector on DP50
Image 3-3
Physical indication of Ethernet connector on DP30
Image 3-4
Physical indication of Ethernet connectors on DP100 and DP90
For DP100 and DP90, connect the Ethernet to port 1 or port2.
For DP30 and DP50, a crossed Ethernet cable is necessary.

For DP100 and DP90, a crossed or non crossed cable can be used. the projector
switched automatically for the correct cable.
3.2.2 Ethernet Connection via entering an IP address
This way of connecting to the D-Cine Premiere is not valid when Obtaining an IP address
automatically (DHCP) is enabled.

Possible Ethernet connections

Two Ethernet connection are possible at the same time:
• Primary
• Secondary
Use the primary connection as default to connect the D-Cine Communicator to the D-Cine Premiere.
If another device or another D-Cine Communicator is already connected to the D-Cine Premiere, use the
secondary connection to connect.
Connection
1. Click on the tab button Network Connection. (image 3-5)
The tab page opens.
2. Fill out the Ethernet address of the D-Cine Premiere.
Note: An address contains 4 octets with a maximum value of 255.
3. Select a Port by clicking Primary (default selected when starting up) or Secondary. (image 3-6)
4. Click on Connect. (image 3-7)
When a connection is possible, a Logon Successful will be indicated in the connection status pane.
(image 3-8)
All other tabs will become enabled and accessible.
Image 3-5
Selecting Ethernet

Image 3-6
Primary port selected within an Ethernet connection
Image 3-7
Selecting Connect
Image 3-8
Logon connection status
3.2.3 Ethernet connection via short cuts

Broadcast query
The broadcast query for projectors scans the complete LAN network to detect available projectors on the
network.
These projectors will be indicated in the Available projectors on the Ethernet pane as short cuts. The short
cut will be referenced by the IP address and the host name of the projector.
Broadcast Query for projectors is based on UDP.
Connection
1. Double click on the short cut of the projector you want to make a connect with. (image 3-9)
Tip: The IP address and host name of the projector is displayed below the short cut.
(image 3-10)
The projector IP address will be filled out in the Host Address field.

Image 3-9
Available projectors on the Ethernet
Image 3-10
3.3 Serial Port Connection

Overview
• Serial Connection to RS232/422
• Serial Connection to Loop In / Out
• Modem Dial Up connection
3.3.1 Serial Connection to RS232/422

Physical connection
Connect a serial cable from PC to projector
Image 3-11
Physical indication of RS232/422 connector on DP50

Image 3-12
Image 3-13
Physical indication of RS232/422 connector on DP100 and DP90
Necessary parts
Straight serial cable from PC to projector.
Software connection
1. Click on the tab button Serial Connection. (image 3-14)
The tab page opens.
2. Set up the communication port by clicking on the drop down menu (1) and selecting the correct port.
(image 3-15)
3. Click on the bits per second drop down menu (2) to setup the desired baud rate.

Image 3-14
Selecting Serial Port
Image 3-15
Selecting the communication port
Image 3-16
Selecting Connect
3.3.2 Serial Connection to Loop In / Out

Physical connection
Connect a serial cable from PC to projector

Image 3-17
Physical indication of the Serial Loop in connector on DP50
Image 3-18
Physical indication of the Serial Loop in connector on DP30
Image 3-19
Physical indication of the Serial Loop in connector on DP100 and DP90
Necessary parts
Straight serial cable from PC to projector.
Software connection
1. Click on the tab button Serial Connection. (image 3-20)
The Serial Connection tab opens.
2. Set up the communication port (1) by clicking on the drop down menu and selecting the correct port.
(image 3-21)
The bits per second (2) has no importants.
3. Check the box in front of Serial Network mode. (image 3-22)

The Bits per second box grays out. The communication speed is only 115200 bps.
The default projector address is set to 1.
4. To change the projector address, click on the up or down arrow until the desired address in shown in
the box.
Image 3-20
Selecting Serial Port
Image 3-21
Selecting the communication port

Image 3-22
Serial bus mode selection
Image 3-23
Selecting Connect
3.3.3 Modem Dial Up connection

What is possible
To take full control of the projector via a telephone line from anywhere in the world.
PSTN
PSTN (public switched telephone network) is the world’s collection of interconnected voice-
oriented public telephone networks, both commercial and government-owned.
Null modem cable

An adapter cable or adapter piece to switch the receive and transmit line within a RS232 cable.
Principle hardware set up

Principle diagram :

Technican side anywhere in Cinema theatre side

the world
Any type of
modem
Desk top
Modem US Robotics
or V.everything
PSTN
Null modem cable
Laptop with
built in modem
D-Cine projector
Image 3-24
Principle diagram modem connection
The following hardware configuration should be set up:

At the Cinema theatre side (optional package) :
• Connect a US Robotics modem via a null modem cable to the IN Serial Network connector on the
D-Cine projector.
• Connect the other side with the analog telephone line.
Modem on theatre side is configured for auto answering and for different users.
For more detailed installation instructions, consult the documentation delivered with the modem package.
At the technician side for a laptop computer with built-in modem :
• Connect the modem output of the laptop to the analog telephone line.
At the technician side for a computer with external modem (any type) :
• Connect the telephone output of the modem with the telephone line.
• Connect the other side of the modem via a serial cable with a com port on the PC.
How to set up the software connection

1. Click on tab button Dialup Connection. (image 3-25)
The dialup connection tab opens.
2. Select the communication port to which your modem is connected (1). (image 3-26)

If it is an external modem, you can physically see to which port it is physically connected.
If it is in internal modem, click Start on your desk top page and select Control Panel. Go to Network
and Dial-up connections. The modem Com port is indicated in that window.
3. Fill out the telephone number (2) of the remote projector’s modem.
The Modem Terminal Window appears. (image 3-28)
This shows the AT commands send to the modem. ATDT number (1) means that the modem is currently
dialing the specified number. CONNECT speeds ... (2) means the other modem is answering.
You will be prompted to enter the password of remote projector’s modem (3). (image 3-29)
5. Fill out your password and click OK.
6. When the message ’Security Access granted’ is displayed, click on Take Control. (image 3-30)
Full control of the projector is now possible via the telephone line.
Image 3-25
Dialup connection selection
Image 3-26
Dialup connection

Image 3-27
Dial-up connection
Image 3-28
Modem Terminal Window
Image 3-29
Modem Terminal Window : password
Image 3-30
Take Control via dial-up
The connection is only guaranteed for the following modem type at the theatre side :
3Com USRobotics Courier V.Everything.

3.4 Disconnection from the D-Cine Premiere

Software disconnection
1. Click on Disconnect. (image 3-31)
A logout will happen. (image 3-32)
Image 3-31
Disconnect from D-Cine Premiere
Image 3-32
Disconnect status
3.5 Changing the password

To change
1. Click on Change Passwords.
The change password menu will be displayed. (image 3-33)
2. Click in the Old password input field and enter your current password.
Note: Your password is case sensitive.
3. Click in the New password input field and enter your new password.
4. Click in the Confirm password input field and re-enter your new password.
5. Click on OK to change your password.
The following messages can be displayed.
- Case sensitivity of the old password (image 3-34)
- Confirm password and new password are not the same. (image 3-35)
Image 3-34
Case sensitivity old password
Image 3-33
Password menu

Image 3-35
Confirm password error
3.6 Reset Projector Head

How to reset
1. Click on Reset Projection Head.
A warning message will be displayed. (image 3-36)
2. Do you really want to reset the head?
If yes, Click on Yes.
The projector head will be reset. The connection will be lost.
If no, Click on No, Cancel this action.
The software returns to the Projector Connection window.
Image 3-36
Reset Projector Head message
Reset projector head, does not mean a complete power down of the head. Only some
boards will be reset.


4. Projector Setup
4. PROJECTOR SETUP
Overview
• Control Interface set up
• Pattern Shortcuts
• Execute Quickly a MacroSet up
• Activate Projector Configuration
• Activate Projector Screen Set up
• Macro Shortcuts for DP30 and DP50
• Input and Source set up
• Output and Screen set up
• Advanced Settings
• Function keys
4.1 Control Interface set up

Overview of the layout
Image 4-1
Set up interface
All the settings and setups are visualised in this control interface.
The following is visualised from left to right:
• The projector type and host name of the projector
• Input source : name of the input source.
• Source Input Frequency
• Processing path : cinema or standard
• Active area in pixels and the aspect ratio
• Lens factor
• Lamp status
• Light output indication
• Dowser open or closed (mechanical dowser), Dowser (E-Dowser) open or closed for electronic dowser.
• Projector logo
• Resizing dimensions
• Letterboxing on or off
• Image projection, a light beam indicates that the projector projects an image, black indicates that no
image is produced.
• Test pattern on/off + the name of the test pattern or preview

4. Projector Setup
4.2 Pattern Shortcuts

What can be done?
A predefined pattern can be set immediately on the projection screen.
To set a pattern
1. Click on one of the predefined icons. (image 4-2)
The selected pattern will be displayed by the projector when the lamp is on and the dowser is open.
The following patterns are available:
- RGB-12bit-Full Screen White.tga
- RGB-12bit-Full Screen Black.tga
- RGB-12bit-ANSI-CheckerBoard Normal.tga
- RGB-12bit-Full Screen Red.tga
- RGB-12bit-Full Screen Blue.tga
- RGB-12bit-Alignment.tga
- RGB-12bit-Color Bars.tga
- Alternating Checkerboard.tga
- RGB-12bit-Full Screen Green.tga
- BDCLogo.tga
Image 4-2
Pattern shortcuts
These patterns can also be selected via Test tab page item Change test pattern.
4.3 Execute Quickly a MacroSet up
Macro
Macro files contains a sequence of commands. These commands are typically select Input
Source, Activate PCF, Activate SCREEN.

4. Projector Setup
When metadata control is enabled on this projector, the execution of macros will not
work as expected. The following message will be displayed:
Image 4-3
Click Yes to turn off metadata control automatically.
How to quickly execute a Macro.

1. Click on Macro. (image 4-4)
A file list of possible Macro files will be retrieve. (image 4-5)
2. Select the desired file out of the list.
3. Click on Execute to execute the macro.
For DP30 and DP50, the macro will be executed.
For DP100 and DP90, the macro will be executed and the macro name will be added just below the
MACRO button. The active PCF and active SCREEN file name will also be added below the corre-
sponding button. (image 4-6)
Image 4-4
Macro selected
Image 4-5
Retrieve Macro files

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-6
Selected macro indicated for DP100 and DP90
Contents of macro files can be edited in the Macro Editor.
4.4 Activate Projector Configuration
PCF File
Projector Configuration File. This file is a file that will be delivered with each movie. It contains
all data needed to display a certain movie as it is defined by the movie distributor.
When metadata control is enabled on this projector, the following message will be dis-
played when clicking on PCF:
Image 4-7
Click Yes to turn off metadata control automatically.
How to quickly activate a PCF file.

1. Click on PCF. (image 4-8)
A file list of possible PCF files will be retrieve. (image 4-9)
3. Click on Activate to load the file in Active.
The configuration will be loaded from the internal file system to ACTIVE. The indication on the Control
interface will change accordingly.

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-8
PCF selected
Image 4-9
Retrieve PCF files
4.5 Activate Projector Screen Set up
Screen File
Screen presentation configuration file. This file contains information about resizing, letterbox-
ing, masking and lens factor.
How to quickly activate a Screen file.

1. Click on Screen. (image 4-10)
A file list of possible Screen files will be retrieve. (image 4-11)
3. Click on Activate to load the file in Active.
The screen presentation configuration will be loaded from the internal file system to ACTIVE. The dif-
ferent indications on the Control interface will change accordingly.
Image 4-10
Screen selected

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-11
Retrieve Screen files
4.6 Macro Shortcuts for DP30 and DP50

What can be done?
The content of the macro file associated with the shortcut will be executed.
MACRO01 is associated with button 1, MACRO02 is associated with button 2, etc. .
To create or to change a macro file, see Macro Editor.
To activate a macro
1. Press on one of the 6 macro shortcuts. (image 4-12)
The macro associated with this button will be executed.
Image 4-12
Macro shortcuts
4.7 Input and Source set up
DVI-EDID
Digital Visual Interface – Extended Display Identification Data
DVI sources that are reported to the projector via the VESA E-EDID standard. These will be
autodetected and displayed at the source format size, using standard processing.
292–DUAL
Input A and input B are combined to 1 input. From a complete signal, part is send to input A
and the other part to input B to reach bigger way through.

4. Projector Setup
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers - A global organization, based in the United
States, that sets standards for baseband visual communications. This includes film as well
video standards.
4:2:2
A commonly used term for a component digital video format. A ratio of sampling frequencies
used to digitize the luminance and color difference components (Y, R-Y, B-Y) of a video signal.
It is generally used as shorthand for ITU-R 601. The term 4:2:2 describes that for every four
samples of Y, there are two samples each of R-Y and B-Y, giving more chrominance bandwidth
in relation to luminance compared to 4:1:1 sampling.
4:4:4
Similar to 4:2:2, except that for every four luminance samples, the color channels are also
sampled four times.
Overview
• Source Selection for DP30 and DP50
• Source Selection for DP100 and DP90
• About DVI standards
• Active Area Selection & Aspect Ratio
4.7.1 Source Selection for DP30 and DP50

How to select a source
1. Click on Source Selection. (image 4-13)
The source selection window opens. (image 4-14)
2. Click on a radio button in front of source type.
The following choices are possible:
- 292 – A
- 292 – B
- 292 – Dual
- DVI – A
- Auto-Select : auto select will monitor the three ports (292-A, 292-B, DVI-A) and select a port that has
an active input signal. If more ports are active simultaneously, the selection is based on priorities
1) DVI – A as first priority
2) 292-A as second priority
3) 292-B as third priority
3. Select the source mode for each input by clicking on the drop down box next to the source type.

4. Projector Setup
The following modes are possible
Source Source Modes

292-A • Standard 4:2:2
• Non Standard 4:2:2, 12 bits/color
292-B • Standard 4:2:2
292-DUAL • Default - 4:2:2 Packed, 10 bits/color, O/E pixels
• 4:2:2 Packed, 10 bits/color, O/E lines
• 4:2:2 Packed, 12 bits/color, O/E pixels
• 4:4:4 Unpacked, 10 bits
• 4:4:4 Packed, 10 bits, Mixed
• 4:4:4 Packed, 10 bits, O/E pixels
• 4:4:4 Packed, 12 bits
DVI-A • Standard 8 bits/color
• 10 bits/color, packed
For more explanation about the supported DVI standards, see "About DVI standards", page 45.
4. Select Processing path for the selected source by clicking on the drop down box. (image 4-15)
Note: Cinema processing contains the following functionality : image scaling, 3:2 pull down function-
ality, SMPTE291 embedded data, LUT’s for analog, de-gamma and color correction. However,
contrast and brightness settings are only applicable for standard processing (non-cinema pro-
cessing).
Standard processing has no scaling, no resizing, and no anamorphic lens factor.
When Automatic is selected, the projector itself makes a choice between standard processing or cinema
processing. The choice depends on the input frequency of the selected source.
5. Press Exit to close the Source Selection window.

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-13
Source Selection
Image 4-14
Source Selection window
Image 4-15
Processing path selection
4.7.2 Source Selection for DP100 and DP90

Overview
• Cine Input
• ACSAR 2 source selection start up
4.7.2.1 Cine Input

How to select a source
1. Click on the check box next to Cine Input. (image 4-16)
The Cine Input buttons becomes active. The path line jumps to the cine input.
2. Click on Cine Input.
The source selection window opens. (image 4-17)
3. Click on a radio button in front of source type.

4. Projector Setup

- 292 – A
- 292 – B
- 292 – Dual
- DVI – A
- DVI – B
- DVI – DUAL/TWIN
- Auto-Select : auto select will monitor the six ports (292-A, 292-B, DVI-A, DVI-B and DVI-Dual) and
select a port that has an active input signal. If more ports are active simultaneously, the selection is
based on priorities
1) DVI – A as first priority
2) 292-A as second priority
3) 292-B as third priority
4. Select the source mode for each input by clicking on the drop down box next to the source type.

4. Projector Setup
The following modes are possible
Source Source Modes

292-A • Standard 4:2:2
292-B • Standard 4:2:2
292-DUAL • Default - 4:2:2 Packed, 10 bits/color, O/E pixels
• 4:2:2 Packed, 12 bits/color, O/E pixels
• 4:2:2 Packed, 10 bits, O/E Frames
• 4:4:4 Unpacked, 10 bits
• 4:4:4 Packed, 10 bits, Mixed
• 4:4:4 Packed, 10 bits, O/E pixels
• 4:4:4 Packed, 12 bits
DVI-A • Standard 8 bits/color
DVI-B • Standard 8 bits/color
DVI-DUAL/TWIN • Dual 10 bits/color, Packed

• Twin 10 bits/color, Packed
For more explanation about the supported DVI standards, see "About DVI standards", page 45.
Note: 292-DUAL with packing 4:2:2 Packed, 10 bits, O/E Frames is used for 3D projection.
5. Select Processing path for the selected source by clicking on the drop down box. (image 4-18)
Note: Cinema processing contains the following functionality : image scaling, 3:2 pull down function-
ality, SMPTE291 embedded data, LUT’s for analog, de-gamma and color correction. However,
contrast and brightness settings are only applicable for standard processing (non-cinema pro-
cessing).
Standard processing has no scaling, no resizing, and no anamorphic lens factor.
When Automatic is selected, the projector itself makes a choice between standard processing or cinema
processing. The choice depends on the input frequency of the selected source.
6. Press Exit to close the Source Selection window.

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-16
Cine input selected
Image 4-17
Source selection window
Image 4-18
Processing path selection
4.7.2.2 ACSAR 2 source selection start up

How to select
1. Click on the check box next to ACSAR 2. (image 4-19)
The ACSAR 2 buttons becomes active. The path line jumps to the ACSAR 2 input.
2. Click on the ACSAR 2 button.

4. Projector Setup
The Alternative Content setup window appears. (image 4-20)
Image 4-19
ACSAR 2 selected
Image 4-20
Alternative Content setup window
For detailed description of the ACSAR 2 functionality via the D-Cine Communicator, see
chapter "ACSAR 2", page 297.
4.7.3 About DVI standards

Supported VESA E-EDID standards
The DVI inputs supports a limited number of sources that will be reported to the host via the VESA E-EDID
data structure standard. These sources are listed in the next table.
These sources will be auto-detected and displayed.

4. Projector Setup
These source bypass the Cinema processing, using standard processing, and will be displayed at the
source format size. Images smaller than the array size will be centered on the array.
Port Protocol Source Vertical Rate Clock Rate Scan Type Color Space
Format1
DDWG DVI 640x480 60 Hz 25.175 MHz Progressive RGB
DDWG DVI 800x600 60 Hz 40 MHz Progressive RGB

For the processing path, select Standard processing path.
When for the processing path, Automatic is selected, the projector will select Standard
Processing path automatically.
Other supported sources

In addition to the sources mentioned in Supported VESA E-EDID standards, the DVI port(s) will support
any input that is presented to the port as described in the next table.
Port Source Vertical Clock Scan Color Process- Display

Protocol Format Rate Rate Type Space ing Path Format
DDWG 1280x1024 23-61 Hz 82.5 MHz Progres- RGB Cinema 1280x1024

DVI sive
DDWG 1280x1024 23-96 Hz 165 MHz Progres- RGB Standard 1280x1024

DVI sive
When for the processing path, Automatic is selected, the projector will select itself the
correct processing path by looking to the Vertical Rate.
For a Vertical Rate between 23 and 61 Hz it will select the Cinema processing path.
For a Vertical Rate higher than 61 Hz it will select the Standard processing path.
4.7.4 Active Area Selection & Aspect Ratio
Aspect ratio
Relation between the horizontal & vertical dimension in which the window will be displayed,
e.g. 4 by 3 or 16 by 9.
1. VESA standard compliant

2. Timing is extrapolated from VESA standard timing

4. Projector Setup
Active Area
The active area within a source frame equals the relevant movie information within the movie stream. E.g.
: 1280 x 1024 movie can be mastered in a 1920 x 1080 stream.
Only the 1280 x 1024 frame contains the relevant movie information. In this case, the active area is 1280
x 1024.
How to start up
1. Click on Active Area Selection. (image 4-21, image 4-22)
The Active Area window opens. (image 4-23)
2. Do you want to set the active area manually?
If no, check Entire Active Input.
When entire active input is checked, the projector will search itself for the active area. If the image is
not correct, uncheck entire active input and continue with step 3, otherwise continue with step 4.
3. Click on the up or down arrows of the Width and Height field to set up the active area size.
Or,
click in the input fields of the Width and Height and enter the values with the keyboard.
The width and the height referring to the size of the image (active area) is set. (image 4-24)
4. Click on the up or down arrows of the Horizontal Center Offset and Vertical Center Offset field to set up
the center offset.
Or,
click in the input fields of Horizontal and Vertical and enter the values with the keyboard.
The offset is referring to the center of the active area and to the center of the source frame. (image 4-25)
5. Select the image aspect ratio by clicking in the drop down box and selecting an aspect ratio.
When automatic is selected, the system assumes square pixels and calculates the aspect ratio based
on the Active Area Size.
When the image pixels are not squared, select one of the following aspect ratios:
- 1.25 [5:4]
- 1.33 [4:3]
- 1.77 [16:9 HDTV]
- 1.85 [Flat]
- 2.39 [Scope]
6. Click Close to return to the Projector configuration window.
Image 4-21 Image 4-22

Selecting active area for DP30 Selecting active area for DP100 and DP90
and DP50

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-23
Active Area window
Image 4-24
Width & height indication

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-25
Center offset indication
1 source frame
2 Active area on source frame
A Horizontal offset
B Vertical offset
4.8 Output and Screen set up

Overview
• Lamp ON/OFF
• Image Orientation
• Lens Type selection
• Anamorphic Lens holder calibration for DP100 and DP90
• Resizing the image
• Masking the image
• Saving Screen Settings while Resizing or Masking
• Dowser Open or Close
• Constant Light Output for DP50
• Light Output and Calibration for DP30
• Light Output and Calibration for DP100-DP90
4.8.1 Lamp ON/OFF

What can be done?
The projection lamp can be switched ON or OFF using the buttons in the software.
Toggling the lamp status

1. Press lamp on icon ( ) in the Output / Screen box. (image 4-26)
The lamp will be switched ON. The interface will indicate lamp ON.
2. Press lamp off icon ( ) to switch off the lamp.

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-26
Toggling the lamp ON/OFF.
Only for DP30:

When the lamp could not be ignited, messages will be displayed with the reason for the
failure.
Typical message are : Lamp runtime exceeded: Issued If 1.5 times maximum runtime
is exceeded, in that case lamp will not be powered. Wrong article number, Wrong lamp
parameter, Communication to LPS failed, Communication to fan controller failed, Lamp
Ignition Failure, Lamp Communication Error.
4.8.2 Image Orientation

Possible orientations
The projector can be configured as:
• Normal front projector
• Normal rear projector
• Upside down front projector
• Upside down rear projection
How to switch
1. Click on Image Orientation. (image 4-27)
The image orientation window pops up. (image 4-28)
2. Click on one of the four possible orientations.
The logo in the middle of the window will change according the projector position.
3. Press Exit to return to the Projector Configuration window.
Image 4-27
Select Image Orientation
Image 4-28
Image orientation set up window

4. Projector Setup
For DP30 : when table mounted (normal cases), set the image orientation on Upside
Down Front projection.
This reverse setting is due to the hardware configuration inside the projector.
4.8.3 Lens Type selection
The anamorphic factor will only be taken into account when the processing path for the
source is Cinema processing.
What will be done?

With this interface, it is possible to select the anamorphic factor for the lens that is attached to the head.
Depending on the lens, the projector will squeeze the image. This is to compensate the effect of the lens.
How to select?
1. Click on Lens Type. (image 4-29)
The Lens anamorphic factor selection window opens. (image 4-30, image 4-31, image 4-32,
image 4-33)
2. Click on the drop down box and select the correct factor.
Projector type Anamorphic factor

DP30 1.00 - 1.50 - 1.90
DP50 1.00 - 1.50 - 1.90
DP100 1.00 - 1.26
DP90 1.00 - 1.26
Custom lens types can be inserted manually.

3. Press Exit to return to the Projector configuration window.
Image 4-29
Lens type selection
Image 4-30
Lens Anamorphic factor set up for DP50

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-31
Lens Anamorphic factor set up for DP30
Image 4-32
Lens Anamorphic factor set up for DP100 and DP90 with motorized lens
Image 4-33
Lens Anamorphic factor set up for DP100 and
DP90 with non-motorized lens

4. Projector Setup
Lens Adjustment for DP30

As a DP30 is equipped with motorized lens adjustments, it is possible to adjust the standard lens via the
D-Cine Communicator software.
Adjusting the standard lens of DP30

1. To shift the image, click on red arrows under Lens shift.(image 4-32)
The image can be moved left-rigth and top-bottom
2. To zoom, click on the red arrow under Lens Zoom.
3. To focus the image, click on the red arrows under Lens Focus.
Lens Adjustment for DP100 and DP90 with motorized lens

As a DP100 or DP 90 is equipped with motorized lens adjustments, it is possible to adjust the standard
lens via the D-Cine Communicator software.
Lens Adjustment for DP100 and DP 90 with motorized lens

1. To shift the image, click on red arrows under Lens shift.(image 4-31)
The image can be moved left-rigth and top-bottom
2. To focus the image, click on the red arrows under Lens Focus.
Lens Adjustment for DP100 and DP90 with non-motorized lens

As the lens adjustment is not motorized, this should be done be hand. For more information on how to
adjust the lens, consult the Installation manual of the projector.
4.8.4 Anamorphic Lens holder calibration for DP100 and DP90

What can be done ?
The shift range of the anamorphic lens holder can be adapted according the used prime lens and anamor-
phic lens.
Pin in - pin out function

The pin in - pin out function is only used for maintenance functions. Consult the service and maintenance
manual of the projector. Never use this function during the calibration procedure.
How to calibrate the shift range?

1. Remove first the anamorphic lens before starting the calibration procedure.
2. Click on the arrow down just below the lens holder buttons (1) to expand the lens calibration window
(2). (image 4-34, image 4-35)
3. Click on Lens Holder On.
The anamorphic lens holder will pivot till the anamorphic lens in on the same axis as the prime lens.
4. Click on the Shift out button to shift the anamorphic lens holder to its maximum position.
5. Turn in the anamorphic lens.
6. Click now on the Shift in button until the anamorphic lens is close to the prime lens (± 5 mm between
prime lens and anamorphic lens..
7. Loosen both screws of the end of range block and slide the block forward until it hits the end of range
switch of the anamorphic lens holder. (image 4-36)
8. Fixate both screws of the end of range block.

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-34
Anamorphic Lens calibration for DP100/DP90 with motorized lens

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-35
Anamorphic Lens calibration for DP100/DP90 with non-motorized lens
Image 4-36
End of range blocks
4.8.5 Resizing the image
CAUTION: Set lens anamorphic factor to 1.0 before starting resizing.

4. Projector Setup
For standard processing paths, no resizing is not taken into account.
Overview
• What is Resizing?
• Resizing with the arrow keys
• Resizing with direct user input
• Letterbox function
Displaying test patterns to check resizing: make sure the anamorphic lens factor is set
correctly.
Resizing images are only give as an illustration to explain the principle. There is a dif-
ference between the DP30-DP50 and DP100-DP90.
4.8.5.1 What is Resizing?

Definition
With the resizing tool it is possible to adapt the projected image on the screen size (defining the area
available for image display). So, look always to the screen when resizing the image.
The projector will always attempt to keep the image centered within this defined area, and the correct
aspect ratio of the image will always be preserved.
The key function that determines how the image will be displayed is the Letterbox function. For a more
detailed explanation, see "Letterbox function", page 60.
As the D-Cine Premiere project an image under an angle, the original image will be shown
as trapezium.
The image will be squared with the masking function by masking the shaded areas.
4.8.5.2 Resizing with the arrow keys
Click on to return to the initial values for the selected dots while resizing the image.
Before starting the resizing, it is preferable to select a test pattern.
How to resize?
1. Click on Resizing. (image 4-37)
The Resizing window opens. (image 4-38)

4. Projector Setup
2. As it is preferable to resize on a test pattern rather then on the normal image, select a pattern by clicking
on one of the pattern short cuts.
The following patterns can be selected:
- full white
- hatch pattern (image 4-39)
When a button is pressed (in state on the interface), the pattern is selected.
3. Select a red button (indicated by an arrow in the image 4-38) by clicking on it. To select both buttons
together, select first one button, hold the shift key down and select the second button.
A selected button becomes clear red.
4. Move the selected button by pressing on the arrow keys on your keyboard.
Or,
by pressing the arrows of the keypad interface.
Note: The representation on the interface is not an exact representation of the resizing on the screen.
Therefor, always look to the screen to see the exact resizing.
The image will move in the direction of the clicked arrow. Yellow arrows on the interface image will
indicate the direction. The values in the corner will change accordingly. (image 4-40)
5. When finished, press Exit to return to the Projector Configuration menu.
Note: Before pressing Exit, it is possible to save the screen setting. see "Saving Screen Settings while
Resizing or Masking", page 70 for more explanation.
Image 4-37
Start up Resizing
Image 4-39
Short cuts to patterns
A Full white pattern

B Hatch pattern
Image 4-38
Resizing window

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-40
Resizing indication
When leaving the Resize window without switching off the test pattern, this pattern will
still be available for masking.
As the resizing is best done on a test pattern, when finished, switch back to the normal
image to check the resizing settings.
After resizing set the anamorphic lens factor back to its original value.
4.8.5.3 Resizing with direct user input

What can be done
With direct user input it is possible to enter the resizing values with your keyboard.
How to resize
1. Click on Resizing. (image 4-41)
The Resizing window opens. (image 4-42)
- full white

4. Projector Setup
3. Select a red button by clicking on it. To select both buttons together, select first one button, hold the
shift key down and select the second button.
4. Right click on a selected button.
The coordinate window pops up on the resize window. (image 4-44)
5. Click in the input fields for X and Y and fill out the desired value.
6. Click on Apply to activate the resizing.
7. When finished, press Exit to return to the Projector Configuration menu.
Image 4-41
Start up Resizing
Image 4-43

B Hatch pattern
Image 4-42
Resizing window

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-44
When leaving the Resize window without switching off the test pattern, this pattern will
still be available for masking.
As the resizing is best done on a test pattern, when finished, switch back to the normal
image to check the resizing settings.
After resizing set the anamorphic lens factor back to its original value.
4.8.5.4 Letterbox function

Function
The letterbox function determines how the image will be displayed.
If Letterbox enabled is checked, the system will show all of the original image data on the screen. This
may require that the system letterbox the image, either on the top and bottom, or left and right side.
If Letterbox enabled is not checked, the system will fill all the screen with image data. This may require
that the system discard image data, either from the top and bottom, or the left and right side.
The following two examples show what will be displayed based on the state of the letterbox function.
Letterbox enabled.

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-45
Example letterboxing enabled
W and H are width and height of the resized area.

4. Projector Setup
• A : input source
• B:
- Resized area equals the maximum DMD size
- The input image has a different aspect ratio from the resized area.
- Full image is letterboxed (top and bottom) and centered within the resized area.
• C:
- The screen height is narrowed, bottom is moved upwards.
- Full image is letterboxed (top and bottom) and centered within the resized area.
• D:
- Bottom of resized area is moved upward to where image fills this area.
- The input image has now the same aspect ratio from the resized area.
- Full input image centered within the resized area and letterboxing is not required.
• E:
- Bottom of resized area has moved upward to where image at previous size cannot be fully dis-
played.
- Resized area reduced in both directions (maintaining aspect ratio) so full scaled image can be dis-
played.
- Image is letterboxed ( right side and left side).
Letterbox disabled

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-46
Example letterboxing disabled
W and H are width and height of the resized area.

4. Projector Setup
• A : input source
• B :
- Resized area equals the maximum DMD size
- Image is scaled up to fill resized area, requiring that some input data be discarded because it falls
outside the resized area (dark transparent areas left and right).
• C:
- Bottom of resized area has moved upward.
- Image is scaled up to fill resized area, requiring that some input data be discarded because it falls
outside the resized area (dark transparent areas left and right).
• D:
- Bottom of resized area has moved upward so that the height is smaller than the image height.
- Input image is not scaled, however, data at the top of the image must be discarded because it falls
outside of the resized area, and data at the bottom of the image must be discarded because it falls
outside the resized area.
4.8.6 Masking the image
CAUTION: Set lens anamorphic factor to 1.0 before starting masking the image
Overview
• What is masking
• Masking via the arrow keys
• Masking with direct user input
Displaying test patterns to check masking: make sure the anamorphic lens factor is set
correctly.
Masking images are only give as an illustration to explain the principle. There is a dif-
ference between the DP30-DP50 and DP100-DP90.
4.8.6.1 What is masking

Definition
After resizing the image, it may be still need to mask away pixels on the screen due to keystone and/or
bow distortion of the projected image. So look always at the screen while masking pixels.

4. Projector Setup
shaded areas will be masked.
Image 4-47
Masking indication
4.8.6.2 Masking via the arrow keys
Click on to reset the masking for the selected button.
Before starting masking, it is preferable to select a test pattern.
How to mask?
1. Click on Masking. (image 4-48)
The masking window pops up. (image 4-49)
In most cases, test pattern will be on. If not continue with step 2, otherwise with step 3.
- full white
3. Click on a red button in one of the corners. To select extra corner buttons together, select first one
button, hold the shift key down and select another button.
4. Move the selected button by pressing on the arrow keys on your keyboard.
Or,
The image will move in the direction of the clicked arrow. Yellow arrows on the interface image will
indicate the direction. The values in the corner will change accordingly. (image 4-51)

4. Projector Setup
5. Click on a red square in the middle of a side.

Note: Only one square button can be selected at a time.
6. Move the selected square by pressing on the arrow keys on your keyboard
Or,
The moving will blind the side-curves. A yellow arrow with a curved yellow line will show the direction
of the correction. The value will change accordingly. (image 4-52)
7. Press Exit to return to the Projector Configuration.
Image 4-48
Start up Masking
Image 4-50

B Hatch pattern
Image 4-49
Masking window

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-51
Masking the corners
Image 4-52
Curve masking
Press the Reset All button to reset the complete masking.
As the masking is best done on a test pattern, when finished, switch back to the normal
image to check the masking settings

4. Projector Setup
After masking set the anamorphic lens factor back to its original value.
Do not forget to switch off the test patterns.
4.8.6.3 Masking with direct user input

What can be done
With direct user input it is possible to enter the masking values with your keyboard.
Before starting masking, it is preferable to select a test pattern.
How to mask
1. Click on Masking. (image 4-53)
The masking window pops up. (image 4-54)
In most cases, test pattern will be on. If not continue with step 2, otherwise with step 3.
- full white
3. Click on a red button in one of the corners. To select extra corner buttons together, select first one
button, hold the shift key down and select another button.
4. Right click on a selected corner button.
The coordinate window pops up on the masking window. (image 4-56)
5. Click in the input fields for X and Y and fill out the desired value.
6. Click on Apply.
The corner masking will be applied to the image on the screen.
7. Right click on a selected square button in the middle of a side.
The curve factor window pops up on the masking window. (image 4-57)
8. Click on the input field and enter the curve factor.
9. Click on OK.
The curve masking will be applied to the image on the screen.
10.Press Exit to return to the Projector Configuration menu.

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-53
Start up Masking
Image 4-55

B Hatch pattern
Image 4-54
Masking window
Image 4-56
Direct masking input corners

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-57
Curve factor window for masking
Press the Reset All button to reset the complete masking.
As the masking is best done on a test pattern, when finished, switch back to the normal
image to check the masking settings
After masking set the anamorphic lens factor back to its original value.
Do not forget to switch off the test patterns.
4.8.7 Saving Screen Settings while Resizing or Masking
CAUTION: Before saving SCREEN settings, set first the anamorphic lens factor back
the value used before.
How to overwrite an existing file.

1. While in Resizing or Masking, click on Overwrite. (image 4-58)
The file selection window pops up. (image 4-59)
2. Select a file you want to overwrite and click Overwrite.

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-58
Save Screen File
Image 4-59
File Selection window
How to save in a new file

1. While in Resizing or Masking, click on Save (image 4-58).
The file name enter window opens. (image 4-60)
2. Fill out a file name and click on OK.
The ACTIVE settings for resizing, masking and lens factor will be stored in the entered file.
Image 4-60
Input File name window
4.8.8 Dowser Open or Close

What can be done?
With this function you have full control over the dowser setting. With a single click it is possible to open
or close the dowser.
How toggling the dowser

1. Click on one of the dowser icons to open or close the dowser. (image 4-61)
The status of the dowser is indicated on the interface window.
To open the dowser, click on the open icon ( ).
To close the dowser, click on the close icon ( ).
Image 4-61
Open or close the dowser
4.8.9 Constant Light Output for DP50
The constant light output functions are options for which a key must be installed.

4. Projector Setup
Overview
• Start up of the CLO functions
• Read out the light output
• Calibrating CLO
What is CLO?
The CLO function will regulate the lamp power within its minimum and maximum limits, to ensure a con-
stant light output.
4.8.9.1 Start up of the CLO functions

How to start up
1. Click on CLO. (image 4-62)
The CLO read out / calibration window will be displayed. (image 4-63)
Image 4-62
Start up of the CLO functions
Image 4-63
4.8.9.2 Read out the light output

How to read out
1. Click on Read CLO now. (image 4-64)

4. Projector Setup
A Read CLO message will appear on the screen. (image 4-65)

To read out the light output value, it is necessary to set the screen out to black. All light must be redi-
rected to the CLO measuring device inside the projector to measure the correct value.
2. Do you want to continue?
The screen becomes black and the measuring starts. The interface window becomes black too and
after a few seconds the value will be filled out in footLambert.
The Read CLO now button changes into Stop reading. When the value is filled out, click on stop
Reading to return the screen output to normal. (image 4-66)
If no, click on No, cancel this action.
The screen returns to the CLO read out / calibration window.
Image 4-64
CLO window, read selected
Image 4-65
CLO read message
Image 4-66
Stop reading light output
4.8.9.3 Calibrating CLO

How to calibrate
1. Press Measure now. (image 4-67)

4. Projector Setup
A measure CLO message will be displayed. (image 4-68)

To measure the CLO output, it is necessary to set the screen output to fully white. All light must be
projected on the screen to measure the light output correctly with a colorimeter.
If yes, Click on Yes and continue with step 3.
A measuring busy screen will be displayed and the screen output will go automatically white. (im-
age 4-69)
If no, click on No, cancel this action to return to the CLO read out ./ calibration window.
3. Measure the amount of footLambert with a colorimeter on the screen.
4. Press Insert measured values. (image 4-70)
An Insert value / calibrating CLO message will be displayed. (image 4-71)
To insert the measured value, the screen output must set to fully black.
If yes, Click on Yes to continue.
The screen goes fully back and the insert value window opens. Continue with step 6. (image 4-72)
If no, Click No, cancel this action to return to the CLO read out / calibration window.
6. Click in the fill out field and insert the measured value.
7. Click OK to continue.
The projector CLO is now calibrated. (image 4-73)
Image 4-67
Selecting measure now
Image 4-68
Measure CLO message

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-69
Measuring CLO on Screen
Image 4-70
Select insert measured values
Image 4-71
Insert value / calibrating message

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-73
Calibration successful message
Image 4-72
Insert value window for measured CLO
4.8.10 Light Output and Calibration for DP30
Overview
• Target set up for Normal Mode
• Target set up for CLO Mode
• Light output Calibration
What is CLO?
The CLO function will regulate the lamp power within its minimum and maximum limits, to ensure a con-
stant light output.

How to start up
The Light Output / calibration window will be displayed. Depending on the mode selection, the window
can be a little bit different. (image 4-75)

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-74
Image 4-75
Light output / calibration window
4.8.10.2 Target set up for Normal Mode

How to set up
1. Check the radio button next to Normal Mode. (image 4-76)
The mode selection pane changes to the Normal mode parameters.
2. Adjust with the slide bar until the desired lamp power is obtained.
Or,
click on the up or down arrow until the desired power is obtained.
The Current Light Output and Lamp power pane will change accordingly. A histogram will indicate the
lamp power. The color of that histogram changes from green when lamp power is minimum to red when
the lamp power is maximum. The value indication can have a tolerance of 50W. So the value can be
50W higher or lower than the entered target value. The corresponding footLambert value will change
accordingly. (image 4-77)

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-76
Normal mode selection
Image 4-77
Lamp indications
4.8.10.3 Target set up for CLO Mode
Target set up for CLO mode is lens dependent.
Before starting the calibration procedure, set the lamp power to its minimum power in
normal mode. Start calibration with a 1.0 lens.
CLO mode is only available when a valid CLO key is installed.
How to set up
1. Check the radio button next to CLO Mode. (image 4-78)
The mode selection pane changes to the CLO mode parameters.
2. Enter the target foodLambert by clicking on the up or down arrows.
3. Click on Set target now.
The lamp power will change accordingly between maximum and minimum until the entered light output
is reached each time the lamp is switched off and is ignited again.
When the entered value is to high, the lamp power goes to its maximum. When the value is to low, the
lamp power goes to its minimum.

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-78
CLO mode selection
4.8.10.4 Light output Calibration
Light output calibration is lens specific. This procedure has to be redone for each other
lens used with the projection system.
How to calibrate
1. Select first the lens anamorphic factor via Lens Configuration.
2. Physically install the corresponding lens onto the projection system.
3. Switch on a white test pattern via the pattern short cuts.
4. Measure the light output in the middle of the screen with a light meter.
5. Enter the measured value into the input box next to corresponding lens indication.
6. Click on Calibrate to start the calibration procedure. (image 4-79)
The calibration message window will be displayed. (image 4-80)
7. Click Yes to start the calibration.
Image 4-79
Start calibration
Image 4-80
Calibration message

4. Projector Setup
4.8.11 Light Output and Calibration for DP100-DP90

Overview
• Target set up for Normal Mode
• Target set up for CLO Mode
• Light output Calibration

How to start up
The Light Output / Calibration window will be displayed. Depending on the lamp type, the values in left
pane will be different. (image 4-82)
Image 4-81

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-82
Light output / calibration window
4.8.11.2 Target set up for Normal Mode

How to set up
1. Check the radio button next to Normal Mode. (image 4-83)
The mode selection pane changes to the Normal mode parameters.
2. Adjust with the slide bar until the desired lamp power is obtained.
Or,
click on the up or down arrow until the desired power is obtained.
The Current Light Output and Lamp power pane will change accordingly. A histogram will indicate
the lamp power. The color of that histogram changes from green when lamp power is minimum to
red when the lamp power is maximum. The corresponding footLambert value will change accordingly.
(image 4-84)
Image 4-83
Normal mode selection

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-84
Lamp indication
4.8.11.3 Target set up for CLO Mode
Target set up for CLO mode is lens dependent.
Before starting the calibration procedure, set the lamp power to its minimum power in
normal mode. Start calibration with a 1.0 lens.
CLO mode is only available when a valid CLO key is installed.
How to set up
1. Check the radio button next to CLO Mode. (image 4-85)
The mode selection pane changes to the CLO mode parameters.
2. Enter the target foodLambert by clicking on the up or down arrows.
3. Click on Set target now.
The lamp power will change accordingly between maximum and minimum until the entered light output
is reached each time the lamp is switched off and is ignited again.
When the entered value is to high, the lamp power goes to its maximum. When the value is to low, the
lamp power goes to its minimum.
Image 4-85
For DP100-DP90, CLO mode selected

4. Projector Setup
4.8.11.4 Light output Calibration
Light output calibration is lens specific. This procedure has to be redone for each other
lens used with the projection system.
How to calibrate
1. Select first the lens anamorphic factor via Lens Configuration.
2. Physically install the corresponding lens onto the projection system.
3. Switch on a white test pattern via the pattern short cuts.
4. Measure the light output in the middle of the screen with a light meter.
5. Enter the measured value into the input box next to corresponding lens indication.
6. Click on Calibrate to start the calibration procedure. (image 4-86)
The calibration message window will be displayed. (image 4-87)
7. Click Yes to start the calibration.
Image 4-86
Start calibration
Image 4-87
Calibration message
4.9 Advanced Settings

Overview
• Advanced Source settings
• Advanced Image settings
• Advanced 3D Settings
• Image Freeze

4. Projector Setup
4.9.1 Advanced Source settings

Overview
• Start up of the advanced source settings
• SMPTE Field bit
• SMPTE 291
• 3 - 2 pull down
• Re-synchronisation
• Offset
4.9.1.1 Start up of the advanced source settings

How to start up
1. Click on Source Settings within Advanced settings. (image 4-88)
The Advanced settings window opens. (image 4-89)
Image 4-88
Source settings selected
Image 4-89
Advanced Settings window
4.9.1.2 SMPTE Field bit

When used
The SMPTE field bit function is used for segmented frames. Both rasters of the image could be shifted in
a wrong way. This can be corrected by forcing the SMPTE field bit from normal to inverse or vice versa.
How to invert
1. Click on Source Settings.
The Advanced Source settings window opens.
2. Click on the drop down box next to SMPTE field bit and select the desired value. (image 4-90)
Default value : normal

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-90
Advanced settings window : SMPTE field bit
4.9.1.3 SMPTE 291

How to toggle
2. Click on the drop down box next to SMPTE 291 and select the desired value. (image 4-91)
Enabled Decoding of SMPTE291 auxillary data, embedded in the SMPTE292 data stream, is
enabled. This data could be decryption data, meta data, etc.
Disabled Decoding of SMPTE291 auxillary data is disabled.
Image 4-91
Advanced settings window : SMPTE 291
4.9.1.4 3 - 2 pull down

When used
Activate 3-2 pull down when 24 fps of film must be mapped onto 30 fps (60 fields) or 25 fps (50 fields) to
be shown as normal video.
How to toggle
2. Click on the drop down box next to 3-2 pull down and select the desired value. (image 4-92)

4. Projector Setup
disabled Pull down process not active (default)

enabled Pull down process active.
Image 4-92
Advanced settings window : 3-2 pull down
4.9.1.5 Re-synchronisation
When used
The re-synchronisation command is used to enable or disable the re-synchronisation function associated
with the Pull-Down Sequence. It is sometimes useful to disable the re-synchronisation function when the
time code is not running at the proper rate, such as when a jog control is being used with a tape machine.
How to toggle
2. Click on the drop down box next to Re-synchronisation and select the desired value. (image 4-93)
enabled Re-synchronisation function enabled

disabled Re-synchronisation function disabled
Image 4-93
Advanced settings window : Re-Synchronisation
4.9.1.6 Offset
Why offset
The offset command is used to select the offset or dominant field associated with the Pull-Down Sequence.
The offset can be changed between field 0, field 1, field 2, field 3, field 4 or field 5.

4. Projector Setup
How to change
2. Click on the drop down box next to Offset and select the desired offset. (image 4-94)
Image 4-94
Advanced settings window : Offset
4.9.2 Advanced Image settings

Overview
• Start up of the advanced image settings
• Anti log Lut
• De-Gamma Lut
• 3D lookup table (complex Lut)
• Image Scaling
4.9.2.1 Start up of the advanced image settings

How to start up
1. Click on Image Settings within Advanced settings. (image 4-95)
The Advanced settings window opens. (image 4-96)
Image 4-95
Image settings selected

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-96
Advanced Image settings window
4.9.2.2 Anti log Lut
Lut
Look up table
How to toggle
1. Click on Image settings.
The Advanced Image settings window opens.
2. Click on the drop down box next to Antilog Look up table and select the desired value. (image 4-97)
activated Anti-Logarithmic data correction is activated.

by Anti-Logarithmic data correction is by passed.
passed
default value : activated (image 4-98)
Image 4-97
Advanced image settings : anti log Lut

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-98
Anti lut exemple
A Original source with logaritmical input signal

B Image when by passing the logarithmic data correction
Anti log look up table can be edited with the PCF Editor.
4.9.2.3 De-Gamma Lut

How to toggle
2. Click on the drop down box next to DeGamma Look up table and select the desired value. (image 4-99)
activated De-gamma correction is activated.

by De-gamma correction is by passed
passed
Default value : Activated
Image 4-99
Advanced image settings : De-Gamma Lut
DeGamma lookup table can be edited with the PCF Editor.

4. Projector Setup
4.9.2.4 3D lookup table (complex Lut)

What are Complex Luts
These complex lut tables are used to color correct the output signals.
How to toggle
2. Click on the drop down box next to 3D lookup table and select the desired value. (image 4-100)
activated Color correction is activated.

by Color correction is by passed.
passed
Default value : Activated
Image 4-100
Advanced Image settings : complex Lut
4.9.2.5 Image Scaling

When used
Image scaling is only available in the Cinema processing path.
Image scaling is available in both directions, horizontal and vertical.
The image scaling filter coefficients are optimized for bandwidth-limited image contents, and as such, they
may not suitable for high bandwidth image contents. Therefore when graphics data is being processed in
the Cinema processing path, it is desirable to disable the filter.
How to enable/disable
2. Click on the drop down box next to Image scaling and select the desired value. (image 4-101)
enable With image scaling enabled, the incoming data is scaled according to the screen
presentation file.
disable If the image filter is disabled, and if resizing of the image is occurring, the output will be
a nearest neighbor resample of the input.
If the image filter is disabled, and if no resizing of the image is occurring, the output will
be a pixel for pixel representation of the input.

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-101
Advanced Image settings : image scaling
In no resizing is desired, the user should set the Active Area (SOURCE) data (input image
size) and Resizing (SCREEN) data (output image size) such that the input and output
image sizes match.
4.9.3 Advanced 3D Settings

Overview
• About 3D projection
• Start up of the advanced 3D settings
• Frame rate multiplication
• 3D Test pattern
• 3D Controls
3D projection can only be performed on a D-Cine Premiere DP100 and DP90.
3D information can be stored to EXTRA files which can be recalled via a macro.
4.9.3.1 About 3D projection

Summary
Typical scenario for 3D projection:
24 Hz
292A
L1, L2, L3, L4,...
Interface 48 Hz Processor 48 Hz EFIB 96 Hz Modular
Board L1, R1, L2, R2... Board L1, R1, L2, R2... L1, R1, L1, R1, Formatter
L2, R2, L2, R2,...
24 Hz
292B
R1, R2, R3, R4,...
Image 4-102
Signal flow processing path
The left eye image data comes in over a HDSDI 24 p signal on port A on the projector.
The right eye image data comes in over a HDSDI 24p signal on port B of the projector.

4. Projector Setup
On the interface board both signals are combined to a 48 Hz signal. Left and right frames are combined.
The signals are further up scaled to 96 Hz at the level of the Modular Formatter and DMD
The 48 Hz signals can be outputted to an external polarizer system, or active polarity glasses. They can
be outputted through the GPO connection.
For 3D projection, with Dual link HDSDI input where the input A represents the left eye stream, and input
B represents the right eye stream, the following settings should be enabled.
Input selection Cine input
Source selection 292 Dual
Mode selection 4:2:2 Unpacked, 10 bits, O/E

Frames
3D settings
Frame rate Multiplication 4:2
L/R Input Reference Use active data port: Port A =

Left; Port B = Right
Set 3D Dark Time adjustment, 3D L/R Output Reference Delay and 3D L/R Output Polarity as needed.
4.9.3.2 Start up of the advanced 3D settings

How to start up
1. Click on 3D Settings within Advanced settings. (image 4-103)
The Advanced 3D settings window opens. (image 4-104)
Image 4-103
3D settings selected

4. Projector Setup
Image 4-104
Advanced 3D settings window
4.9.3.3 Frame rate multiplication

Introduction
The system provides the capability to do frame rate multiplication based on an N/M system.
For this system, M and N are defined as follows:
• M is defined as the number of input frames of data (defined by input vertical sync) that are required to
constitute a full frame of image data. This parameter is used to determine the “base” or “full” image
frame rate for the input data, in the form: Base rate (Hz) = Input frame rate (Hz) / M.
• N is defined as the number of frames of data to be displayed during a base rate time. This parameter
is used to determine the output vertical rate, in the form: Output rate (Hz) = Base rate (Hz) * N
The following are a few examples:
Example 1:
• Full frame of picture data input each vsync, therefore M = 1

• One frame of picture data output each base rate, therefore N = 1
E.g. 24 Hz input, 24 Hz output (Normal projector use)
Example 2:
• ½ frame of picture data input each vsync, therefore M = 2

• frames of picture data output each base rate, therefore N = 4
E.g. LR data input at 48Hz, LRLR output at 96Hz (LRLR 3D)
4:2 is generally used for 3D.

4. Projector Setup
Frame rate Setup

Click on the combo box next to Multiplication and select the desired multiplication.
1:1 is normal projector use.
4:2 is generally used for 3D
others are used for experimental purposes.
4.9.3.4 3D Test pattern

What can be done?
With the 3D test pattern, it is possible to test the complete setup in combination with an external polarizer
system, or active polarity glasses. The output frequency of the test pattern can be entered so that the
simulation of the input signal is completely.
Entering the output frequency

1. Click in the input field next to the test pattern icon. (image 4-105)
2. Enter the new frequency with the keyboard.
Image 4-105
3D test pattern
How to check the complete setup

1. Click on the test pattern icon to run the test pattern.
A 3D test pattern generated on the interface board will be displayed.
Alternating, the left and the right pattern will be displayed.
For the best test pattern and to display the pattern for the left or the right eye:
- set the frequency on 48 Hz
- set frame rate multiplication on 4:2
- set 3D control, 3D L/R Input Reference on White Line Code True or Blue Line Code True.
- set 3D L/R Display Reference GPI on one of the GPIs.
- set 3D L/R Display Reference on Use assigned GPI (polarity = true)
- set 3D Dark Time Adjustment, 3D L/R Output Reference Delay and 3D L/R Output Reference Polarity
as needed.
Either the left or the right eye pattern will be displayed.
When e.g. the left pattern (indicated with L) is displayed, only the left eye may see this image. When it
is not so, the setup is wrong and should be corrected.
2. Change the 3D setting L/R Display Reference to Use assigned GPI (polarity = false).
When the left patterns was displayed, now the right pattern will be displayed. Only the right eye may
see this pattern. When it is not so, the setup is wrong and should be corrected.

4. Projector Setup
4.9.3.5 3D Controls
Overview
Image 4-106
3D controls
L/R Input Reference

The Input Reference indicates which frame is Right and which frame is Left.
Setting Description
3D disabled no 3D images possible

None Provided no 3D L/R input reference provided
Use assigned GPI (polarity = true) Can be used for single stream inputs
High : Left is Active
Low : Right is Active
Use assigned GPI (polarity = false) Can be used for single stream inputs
High : Right is Active
Low : Left is Active
Use active data port : Port A = Left, Port B = Right Use Active data port assignment (for dual port
sources) to determine 3D L/R input reference.
Use active data port : Port A = Right, Port B = Left Use Active data port assignment (for dual port
sources) to determine 3D L/R input reference
Use <White Line Code> (polarity = true) Use “White Line Code” embedded in data stream
as 3D L/R input reference.

4. Projector Setup
Setting Description
Use <White Line Code> (polarity = inverted) Use “White Line Code” embedded in data stream
Use <Blue Line Code> (polarity = true) Use “Blue Line Code” embedded in data stream
Use <Blue Line Code> (polarity = inverted) Use “Blue Line Code” embedded in data stream
About <White Line Code> or <Blue Line Code>

The White/Blue Line Code is an embedded methodology for specifying whether a specific frame of input
data has left or right eye data.
• The bottom pixel-row of the left-eye subfield should be pure white (blue) for the left-most 25% of the
pixel-row, and pure black for the remainder of the row.
• The bottom pixel-row of the right-eye subfield should be pure white(blue) for the left most 75% of the
pixel-row, and pure black for the remainder of the row.
A B
Image 4-107
White (Blue) line code
A Green field with white L and last lines 25 % white, 75 % black

B Magenta field with last lines 75 % white, 25% black
The system will only sample the blue channel, allowing the external user to use either White or Blue Line
Code. The system will blank out the encoded line so that it is not displayed.
This mechanism is only relevant when using a single stream input. The input reference is encoded in the
content. (Information is on R, G and B channels).
This information can also be on blue channel only (Blue line bottom) Blue Line Code.
Input frame dominance

Only relevant for dual stream input.
The frames are arriving at the same time, but they will be inserted sequentially.
Insert order selection:
• Left (L1, R1, L2, R2 ...)
• Right (R1, L1, R2, L2 ...)
L/R Input Reference GPI

Only relevant if L/R Input Reference is set to Use assigned GPI.
Select the GPI which is used to set retrieve the L/R Input Reference.

4. Projector Setup
L/R Display Reference

The optional 3D L/R Display Reference signal is used to specify which frame of eye data is to be displayed
during a specific display frame. This signal is referenced to the display frame rate which is specified by the
Frame Rate Multiplication command. The system will sample this reference in the middle of each display
frame, inverting the sample for use during the following display frame.
Vsync (Display)
3D L/R Display
Reference
Data (Displayed) Right Left Right Left
Image 4-108
Relationship of 3D L/R Display Reference and displayed data
L/R Display Reference GPI

Only relevant if L/R Display Reference is set to Use assigned GPI.
Select the GPI which is used to set retrieve the L/R Display Reference.
L/R Output Reference Polarity

Indicates the polarity of the outgoing reference signal.
L/R Output Reference GPO

The L/R Output Reference signal provides an external reference to the start of dark time for each displayed
frame, as well as specifying which frame of eye date (left or right) is being displayed.
It is used to synchronize external polarizer systems, or active polarity glasses.
Defines which GPO is used to output the reference signal.
Delay
3D L/R Output
Reference
Data (displayed) Right Left Right Left
Dark time
Image 4-109
Output reference - displayed data
Dark Time Adjustment

Between switching the frames the image needs to be black the same time the external devices need to
switch (external devices can be 3D Glasses, or polarizing filter).
For 3D applications, systems typically need a period of time where the image projected on the screen is
black. This black or “dark time” is used to switch the mechanism that controls what a viewers left eye and
right eye sees. This software command is used to adjust the projector dark time to meet the requirements
of whatever switching mechanism is being used.
3D dark time adjustment will be disabled (set to 0) whenever 3D is disabled. With 3D enabled and 3D
dark time adjustment disabled, the projector will be set to its default dark time of approximately 388 µs.
There is no dark time when 3D is disabled.
The system will have a minimum and maximum dark time that can be achieved. If the specified value is
smaller than the system can provide, the dark time will be set to the systems minimum value, which will
be reported as the actual dark time value. If the specified value is larger than the system can provide, the
dark time will be set to the systems maximum value, which will be reported as the actual dark time value.

4. Projector Setup
For 3D applications, systems typically need a period of time where the image projected on the screen is
black. This black or “dark time” is used to switch the mechanism that controls what a viewers left eye and
right eye sees. For most 3D applications, the system will provide an output reference signal that indicates
whether left or right eye data is being displayed, as well as the start of dark time. This signal is the 3D L/R
Output Reference.
Output Reference Delay

Delay values from Delay – Time and Delay – Phase are added to the nominal timing between the displayed
dark time and the 3D L/R Output Reference.
Dark time
Data (Displayed) Right Left Right Left
3D L/R output reference

Nominal
Positive delay
Negative delay
Image 4-110
Delay example for 3D L/R Output Reference
4.9.4 Image Freeze

How to freeze
1. Check the image freeze check box to freeze the image. (image 4-111)
The word freeze becomes red. (image 4-112)

Advanced Image settings : freeze Advanced Image settings : freeze activated
4.10 Function keys

Overview
F1 Macro 1
F2 Macro 2
F3 Macro 3
F4 Macro 4
F5 Macro 5
F6 Macro 6
F7 Freeze image
F8 De-freeze image

4. Projector Setup
F9 Dowser open
F10 Dowser close

4. Projector Setup

5. Projector Configuration
5. PROJECTOR CONFIGURATION
Overview
• Set up of the Internal Clock
• Set up of the Serial Bus Address
• Set up of the Network Properties
• OPTO-Isolated GPI Configuration
• Controller Configuration
• Lamp Run Time Configuration for DP50
• Lamp Settings for DP30
• Lamp Settings for DP100-DP90
5.1 Set up of the Internal Clock

Set up of the internal clock
1. Set up the date by clicking on the up or down arrow next to the month, day and year input. (image 5-1)
Or,
click in the digit field and enter the correct month, day and year.
2. Set up of the time by clicking on the up or down arrow next to the hour, minute and second input (im-
age 5-1).
Or,
click in the digit field and enter the correct hour, minute and seconds.
3. Click on the graphic icon to set the internal clock. (image 5-2)
A message will be displayed. (image 5-3)
Image 5-1
Internal clock set up
Image 5-3
Image 5-2 Internal clock set message
Setting the internal clock
Set the internal clock with the current PC time

1. Check the box Use PC time. (image 5-4)
2. Click on the graphic icon to set the internal clock (image 5-2).
A message will be displayed (image 5-3).

Image 5-4
Set current PC time as internal clock
5.2 Set up of the Serial Bus Address
Do not change the serial bus address when connected over a serial loop.
How to set up
1. Click on the + or – button next to the address indication. (image 5-5)
2. Click on Apply now.
The serial bus address will be set, the Apply now button will gray out.
Image 5-5
Serial Bus Address Setting
5.3 Set up of the Network Properties
For DP100-DP90, it is highly recommended to set the IP addresses in the same range as
that of the PC running the D-Cine Communicator.
Overview
• Ethernet Connections
• Assign a hostname to the projector
• Assign an Ethernet address via DHCP for the TI boards
• Manually assign an Ethernet address for the TI boards
• Assign an Ethernet address via DHCP for the Barco controller (only for DP100-DP90)
• Manually assign an Ethernet address for the Barco controller
5.3.1 Ethernet Connections
IP
Internet Protocol. The network layer of TCP/IP. Required for communication with the internet.

For a DP100-DP90
In the user interface of the D-Cine Communicator two IP addresses can be changed:
• TI IP address – Cinema IP Address: this IP address is used as the primary access point. This is the
IP address used by the D-Cine Communicator and servers. The servers need to connect to the TI
interface board to send over Metadata and Subtitle data.
• Barco IP address – Projector IP Address: This IP address is used as the secondary access point.
This IP address is used to update the Barco controller DIM PC. It will also be used for third parties
that would like to integrate the projector into a custom system. E.g. Post houses that want to control
a projector through a Creston Controller.
When the projector is set up in a network configuration, those 2 different Ethernet address should be
applied to the projector.
Both Ethernet interfaces, from TI boards and from the Barco controller, are internally connected to a built-in
Ethernet Hub. Both Ethernet ports on the connection panel are also connected to that built-in Ethernet
hub. This hub detects automatically if a straight or crossover cable is used and adjusts this internally. Both
straight and crossed cable can be used.
For a DP50 or DP30

When the projector is set up in a network configuration, only one Ethernet address should be applied to
the projector. Only the TI boards are addressable via Ethernet. A crossed cable must be use to connect
a PC to the Ethernet port.
After changing any Ethernet configuration setting, it is NECESSARY to reset/restart the

projector’s electronics
Subnet mask
A number that is used to identify a subnetwork so that IP addresses can be shared on a local
area network.
Default Gateway
A router that serves as an entry point into and exit point out of a network. For example, a
local network (LAN) may need a gateway to connect it to a wide area network (WAN) or to the
Internet.
DNS server
Computers, Projectors connected to a network are referenced by their IP address. The only
problem is that remembering IP addresses is not easy. If you need to use hundreds of ad-
dresses then it will become impossible to remember them. This is why domain names are cre-
ated. Internet names (domain and host names) are just aliases to these IP addresses. When
you use an Internet address it is automatically translated to an IP address. In fact a program
or device that translates those Internet names to IP addresses is called a DNS Server.
Host name
This is the name that will be returned, along with the IP address in response to the UDP broad-
cast query for projectors.

DHCP
Dynamic host configuration protocol. DHCP is a communications protocol that lets network
administrators manage centrally and automate the assignment of IP addresses in an organi-
zation’s network. Using the Internet Protocol, each machine that can connect to the Internet
needs a unique IP address. When an organization sets up its computer users with a connection
to the Internet, an IP address must be assigned to each machine. Without DHCP, the IP ad-
dress must be entered manually at each computer and, if computers move to another location
in another part of the network, a new IP address must be entered. DHCP lets a network ad-
ministrator supervise and distribute IP addresses from a central point and automatically sends
a new IP address when a computer is plugged into a different place in the network.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
What should be set up for each Ethernet address

2 ways can be used to assign addresses:
• use the DHCP setting so that a automatic address will be assigned.

• Assign manually an IP address, Subnet-mask, default gateway and DNS server address.
- Set the IP-Address field to the desired value. This must NOT be 0.0.0.0 for static IP-Address as-
signment. The IP address identifies a projector’s location on the network in the same way a street
address identifies a house on a city block. Just as a street address must identify a unique residence,
an IP address must be globally unique and have a uniform format.
- Set the Subnet-Mask as appropriate for the local subnet.
- Set the Default-Gateway to the IP-Address of the local router (MUST be on the local subnet!) on
the same network as this projector that is used to forward traffic to destinations beyond the local
network. This must not be 0.0.0.0. If there is no router on the projector’s local subnet then just set
this field to any IP-Address on the subnet.
- Set the DNS server address to the IP address if the DNS server obtained from your network ad-
ministrator or Internet Service Provider. That address can be any address. The DNS Server might
be used in future releases to support the projector subtitling mechanism.
5.3.2 Assign a hostname to the projector
When using the type of projector as part of the hostname, the correct pictographic will
be displayed in the connection window. Otherwise a standard pictographic will be used.
How to set up
1. Click on the TI button. (image 5-6)
Note: For DP30 and DP50, the second part of the window (Barco settings) will be grayed out.
The Network settings window will open.
2. Click in the input field next to Hostname.
3. Enter a hostname for your projector. (image 5-7)
As example : e.g. DP100_Theatre1, DP30_Theatre3

Image 5-6
Image 5-7
Hostname set up
5.3.3 Assign an Ethernet address via DHCP for the TI boards

How to set up
The Network settings window will open. (image 5-9)
2. Check the check box next to Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP).
This selection will become active. Other selections are grayed out.
3. Click on OK to activate.

Image 5-8
Network properties, TI button selected.
Image 5-9
Network settings window, DHCP selected
When DHCP is enabled and the projector does not find a DHCP server on the network,
or the projector is not connected to a network, than the projector will be in a fail state.
The hardware Fail LED on the interface board will be on. The status (Status tab) will
indicate ’Ethernet Not OK’
Image 5-10
Ethernet state

5.3.4 Manually assign an Ethernet address for the TI boards

How to set up
2. Check the check box next to Use the following IP address
3. Click in the input field of the IP address and fill out the 4 fields.
This must NOT be 0.0.0.0 for static IP-Address assignment
4. Click in the Subnet mask input fields and fill out the 4 fields as appropriate for the local subnet.
5. Click in the Default Gateway input fields and fill out the 4 fields. Set the Default-Gateway to the IP-Ad-
dress of the router (MUST be on the local subnet!).
Note: This must NOT be 0.0.0.0.
If there is no router on the projector’s local subnet then just set this field to any IP-Address on
the subnet.
6. Click in the DNS server input fields and fill out the 4 fields.
Note: Address will be provided by your network administrator or Internet Service Provider.
7. Click OK to activate.
Image 5-11

Image 5-12
Network settings window, manual set up selected
The PC’s IP Address MUST be within the same subnet as the projector’s IP Address in
order for communication to be possible. This requires checking the PC’s and projector’s
Subnet-Mask settings.
IP address examples
First example
• PC IP Address : 192.168.100.5
• PC Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
• Projector IP Address : 192.168.100.2
• Projector Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Result : Communication possible. PC address is in the subnet range of the projector’s IP address.
Second example
• PC IP Address : 10.16.236.100
• PC Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Result : No communication possible. PC address is not in the subnet range of the projector’s IP address.
Third example
• PC IP Address : 192.168.200.1
• PC Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
The third group in the PC IP address and Projector IP address must be the same.

Fourth example
• PC IP Address : 192.168.200.1
• PC Subnet Mask : 255.255.0.0
Remark : Communication possible. PC address is in the subnet range of the projector’s IP address. The
third group in the IP¨ addresses can be any value as the third group in the subnet mask is 0.
5.3.5 Assign an Ethernet address via DHCP for the Barco controller (only for
DP100-DP90)
How to set up
1. Click on the BARCO button. (image 5-13)
2. Check the check box next to Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP).
This selection will become active. Other selections are grayed out.
3. Click on OK to activate.
Image 5-13
Network properties, Barco controller
Image 5-14
Network settings window, Barco controller

When DHCP is enabled and the projector does not find a DHCP server on the network,
or the projector is not connected to a network, than the projector will be in a fail state.
The hardware Fail LED on the interface board will be on. The status (Status tab) will
indicate ’Ethernet Not OK’
Image 5-15
Ethernet state
5.3.6 Manually assign an Ethernet address for the Barco controller

How to set up
1. Click on the BARCO button. (image 5-16)
2. Check the check box next to Use the following IP address
3. Click in the input field of the IP address and fill out the 4 fields.
This must NOT be 0.0.0.0 for static IP-Address assignment
4. Click in the Subnet mask input fields and fill out the 4 fields as appropriate for the local subnet.
5. Click in the Default Gateway input fields and fill out the 4 fields. Set the Default-Gateway to the IP-Ad-
dress of the router (MUST be on the local subnet!).
Note: This must NOT be 0.0.0.0.
If there is no router on the projector’s local subnet then just set this field to any IP-Address on
the subnet.
Image 5-16

Image 5-17
Network settings, Barco controller
IP address examples
First example
• PC IP Address : 192.168.100.5
• PC Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Second example
• PC IP Address : 10.16.236.100
• PC Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Third example
• PC IP Address : 192.168.200.1
• PC Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Fourth example
• PC IP Address : 192.168.200.1

5.4 OPTO-Isolated GPI Configuration
GPI
General purpose Input/Output
MACRO
A macro is file that contains a sequence of commands, internally to the projector, that must be
executed.
What is possible
This interface enables the user to configure the automation system that is present inside the projection
head (standard GPI configuration). The D-Cine Communicator enables the user to couple a macro file to
a rising edge or falling edge on one of the inputs of the GPI connector (DB37).
Next to this standard GPI connector, there are also GPIOs on the button module and
eventually on the optional automation modules.
Physical position of the connector.
Image 5-18
Physical position of BD37 connector on DP50

Image 5-19
Physical position of BD37 connector on DP30
Image 5-20
Physical position of DB37 connector on DP100-DP90
How to associate a macro

1. Select a General purpose input by clicking on the drop down box next to GPI selection. (image 5-21)
2. Click on Change next to Falling edge or Rising edge.
The macro selection menu will be displayed. (image 5-22)
3. Select a Macro file and click on Select. (image 5-23)
The selected macro file will be filled out next to falling edge or rising edge. (image 5-24)
4. If one edge is filled out, repeat from step 2 for the other edge if necessary.
5. If a Macro file has to be associated to another GP Input, repeat this procedure.
Image 5-21
General purpose input selection
Image 5-22
Macro selection menu

Image 5-24
Macro file filled out
Image 5-23
Macro selected
How to clear a macro file

1. Click on Clear next to the macro file your want to remove.
To edit or to create a Macro, see "Macro Editor", page 265.
5.5 Controller Configuration

Overview
• Configuring Serial Ports
• Read out of the serial number
• Entering a SNMP key
• SNMP settings
• Entering a CLO key
• Lens Motor Availability
5.5.1 Configuring Serial Ports

What can be done?
A serial port can be configured as RS232 or RS422.
By default all values are set to RS232.
How to configure
1. Click on Configure.
A drop down menu opens. (image 5-25)
2. Select Configure serial ports.
The serial port overview menu will be displayed. (image 5-26)
3. Do you want to configure for RS232?
If yes, Click on RS232 button next to the port input you want to configure.
If no, Click on RS422 button next to the port input you want to configure and click on Terminate if you
want to terminate the line.
4. Repeat from step 3 for the other ports.
5. Click on Set to really configure the ports.

Image 5-25
Select Configure serial ports
Image 5-26
Serial Port overview window
5.5.2 Read out of the serial number

How to read out
A drop down menu opens.
The second line indicates the serial number of the D-Cine Premiere. This serial number can also be
found on the external label on the projection head. (image 5-27)
Image 5-27
Serial number indication
5.5.3 Entering a SNMP key
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol is the protocol governing network management and the
monitoring of network devices and their functions.
What can be done?

Depending whether this option has been ordered, it is necessary to enter the key that has been delivered
with the projector. When the key is correctly entered, the SNMP mechanism will be enabled. From that
moment on a agent will send alarms to a specific person when something goes wrong with the projector.
How to enter a key?

1. Click on Configure. (image 5-28)
2. Click on SNMP key.

The SNMP key window pops up. (image 5-29)

3. Enter the key exactly as indicated.
4. Click on Proceed.
A check window appears to confirm your key entry. (image 5-30)
5. When OK, click Yes.
The SNMP mechanism will be started.
Image 5-28
SNMP key selected
Image 5-29
SNMP key input
Image 5-30
SNMP key check
Deleting a SNMP key

1. Go to Configure and select SNMP key.
The SNMP key window will appears.
2. Press Delete Key(image 5-29).
The key will be removed.
5.5.4 SNMP settings

SNMP Settings start up
1. Click on Configure. (image 5-31)
2. Click on SNMP Settings.
The SNMP settings window opens. (image 5-32)

Image 5-31
SNMP settings selected
Image 5-32
SNMP configuration
Management System address setup

1. Click on Edit to set up the management server address.
The IP address window opens. (image 5-33)
2. Enter the IP address of the management server.
Image 5-33
Management system server IP address
Trap type
SNMP exists in different versions. You have SNMP V1 and SNMP V2. The difference is basically the
format of the SNMP messages. Some management systems will support V1, others will support V2.
Depending on the management system used one should select V1 or V2 traps to be sent out to the man-
agement system.
To change the trap type, click on the combo box next to Trap type and select the corresponding type.
Log size settings

The following settings are sizes of log files that relate to the operation of the SNMP agent.
Basically they should never be changed. These settings can be used for debugging.
Agent ++ log file size: Size of log file that contains logging of the SNMP Agent core engine.
BARCO SNMP log file size: Size of log file that contains logging of software modules build around the
SNMP core engine.
5.5.5 Entering a CLO key
CLO
Constant light output

What can be done?

Depending whether this option has been ordered, it is necessary to enter the key that has been delivered
with the projector. When the key is correctly entered, the CLO mechanism will be enabled. To read out or
to calibrate the CLO for DP50, see "Constant Light Output for DP50", page 71, for DP30, see "Light Output
and Calibration for DP30", page 76, for DP100-DP90, see "Light Output and Calibration for DP100-DP90",
page 80.
What is CLO?
A lamp powered with a constant power will produce less light when ageing. The CLO function boosts the
lamp power so that the light output stays constant.
How to enter
2. Click on CLO key. (image 5-34)
The CLO key window pops up. (image 5-35, image 5-36)
3. Enter the key exactly as indicated.
4. Click on Proceed.
A check window appears to confirm your key entry. (image 5-37)
5. When ok, click on Yes.
The CLO mechanism will be enabled.
Image 5-35
CLO key window for DP50
Image 5-34
Selecting CLO key
Image 5-37
CLO key entry check window
Image 5-36
CLO key window for DP30, DP100 and DP90
Deleting a CLO key in the DP30, DP100 and DP90

1. Go to Configure and select CLO key.
The CLO key window will appears (image 5-36).
2. Press Delete Key.
The key will be removed.

5.5.6 Lens Motor Availability

What can be done?
Only for DP100-DP90.
The D-Cine Premiere can be equipped with a motorized lens or a non-motorized lens. As the software
cannot detect that by itself, that can be configured in the Lens Motor availability.
How to configure?
A drop down menu opens. (image 5-38)
2. Select Lens Motor Availability.
The Lens Motor Availability window opens. (image 5-39)
3. If a motorized lens is available, check the check box.
If no motorized lens is available, uncheck the check box.
Image 5-39
Lens motor availability setup
Image 5-38
Lens availability selected
5.6 Lamp Run Time Configuration for DP50

Run time and strikes
The total run time of the lamp and the number of strikes are indicated in he lamp run time configuration
pane.
Image 5-40
Lamp Run Time and Strikes indication
When using
This configuration can be used when installing a new lamp to set the values to zero or when inserting an
already inserted lamp to set the values to the previous values of this lamp.
How to change
1. Click on the up or down arrows of the value indication box for the lamp run time and/or the number of
strikes. (image 5-41)
2. Click on Apply new values. (image 5-42)
A confirmation window will be displayed with the new values. (image 5-43)

3. If you want to continue, click on Yes.

If you want to cancel, click on No, cancel the action.

Changing the values Applying new values Lamp
Image 5-43
New lamp values confirmation window
5.7 Lamp Settings for DP30

Overview of the settings
Image 5-44
Settings overview
The values are given as read only.

The following values can be consulted:
Run time in hours Run time since first start up of the lamp or since the last reset.
Remaining Run time in Remaining run time that the lamp can be used with risk of damaging the
hours projector.
Strikes Number of strikes since the first start up of the lamp or since the last reset.
Article number Article number of spare lamp which must be used in this projector.
Serial number Serial number of actual installed lamp inside the projector.
When using the Reset button

This reset button has to be used when installing a new lamp to set the value for run time and the number
of strikes to zero and reset the remaining run time.

How to reset the values?

1. Click on Reset.
A reset message will be displayed.
2. Fill out the Article number and the Serial number of the new lamp. (image 5-45)
3. Click on Reset.
The software will check if the entered article number and serial number are valid numbers. If so, the
lamp parameters will be reset. If the entered numbers are not valid, everything remain as it was.
Image 5-45
Lamp reset message
5.8 Lamp Settings for DP100-DP90

Overview of the settings
The values are given as read only.
The following values can be consulted:
Run time in hours Run time since first start up of the lamp or since the last reset.
Remaining Run time in Remaining run time that the lamp can be used without risk of damaging
hours the projector.
Strikes Number of strikes since the first start up of the lamp or since the last reset.
Article number Article number of spare lamp which must be used in this projector.
When using the Reset button

This reset button has to be used when installing a new lamp to set the value for run time and the number
of strikes to zero and reset the remaining run time.
How to reset the values?

1. Click on Reset. (image 5-46)
A reset message will be displayed. (image 5-47)
2. Fill out the article number of the new lamp.
Or,
click on Select to display a list of possible article numbers. Select an article number and click Open.
(image 5-48)
The software will check if the entered article number is a valid number.
3. Fill out the serial number of the lamp. (image 5-49)

4. Click on Reset to activate the procedure.

The lamp parameters for this new lamp will be loaded and the number of strikes, run time and remaining
run time will be reset.
Image 5-46
Select lamp reset
Image 5-47
Lamp reset message
Image 5-49
Lamp article number filled out
Image 5-48
Lamp article number selection

6. PCF Editor
6. PCF EDITOR
Overview
• Introduction
• Active Area
• Anti Log Lookup Table
• Color Space Convertor
• 3D Lookup Table
• Gamma Lookup Table
• Target Color Gamut (P7)
6.1 Introduction
PCF File
Projector Configuration File. This file is a file that will be delivered with each movie. It contains
all data needed to display a certain movie as it is defined by the movie distributor.
Overview
• PCF file content
• PCF editor modes
• Use of the PCF editor in online mode
• Use of the PCF editor in offline mode
• How to start editing
• The use of the sliders
6.1.1 PCF file content

Overview of a PCF file
The diagram below represents the internal projector processing scheme. The colored blocks use data
which is present in the PCF file.
12 12 12 12 12 12 16
12 12 12 Color 12 Complex 12 Masking 12 De-Gamma 16 P7
Anti log
Active 3D Color
LUT Resizer Space & Lookup
Area 12 12 12 12 Lookup 12 12 16 Space
Table Convertor Overlay Table
(SOURCE) Table Correction
(LUT-AL) (CSC) (LUT-DG)
(LUT-CLUT) (TCGD)
Image 6-1
Overview projector processing scheme : Cinema processing

6. PCF Editor
9 9 9 13
Active 9 Color 9 Masking 9 De-Gamma 13
Area Space Lookup
9 9
(SOURCE) 9 Convertor Table 13
Square pixels
(CSC) (LUT-DG)
only
Image 6-2
Overview projector processing scheme : Non-Cinema processing
The PCF file always contains the following data :

• Active area (SOURCE data)
• Anti log lookup table (LUT-AL data)
• Color space convertor data (CSC data)
• 3D lookup table (LUT-CLUT data)
• De Gamma lookup table (LUT-DG data)
• P7 Color Correction data (TCGD data)
The data mentioned in this list can be edited or created with the PCF Editor.
Files that access a part of a PCF file (e.g. Active Area, SOURCE data, ...) will be called PCF sub Files.
For more information about the content of the PCF file format and the PCF sub files format, consult the
appendix.
6.1.2 PCF editor modes

Overview
The PCF editor can be used in two different modes:
• online mode; connected with the projector. In this mode all available PCF files and PCF sub files on
the PC and the projector can be used as starting base to create your own PCF file. Changes will be
displayed immediately on the screen.
• offline or stand alone; only the PCF files and sub files on the PC can be used as starting base to create
your own PCF file.
Used icons
The used icons are the same for PCF files as for the sub files such as SOURCE, etc. . Only the title above
the icon group changes to the typical file types.
Create new file
Open existing file on the PC
Open existing file on the projector
Save settings to a file on the PC
Save settings to a file on the projector
6.1.3 Use of the PCF editor in online mode

Steps to be taken
1. Make a connection to the projector.

6. PCF Editor
2. When you are successfully connected, click on the PCF Editor button.
A full page header will be displayed. Online working is possible. (image 6-3)
Image 6-3
PCF Editor tab header online
The active file is indicated next to the icons. For more information about the indications,
see chapter "9. File Manager", "Read Files Active", page 186.
6.1.4 Use of the PCF editor in offline mode

Steps to be taken
1. Click on the Demo tab. (image 6-4)
The other tabs are activated from now on.
2. Click on the PCF Editor tab.
A reduced page header will be displayed. Only offline working is possible. (image 6-5)
Image 6-5
PCF Editor tab header offline
Image 6-4
Start up offline
6.1.5 How to start editing

The following starting points are possible:
• Starting from a new file
• Starting from a existing PCF file on PC or projector
6.1.5.1 Starting from a new file

How to start
1. Click on the new PCF file icon ( ).
The new PCF file window appears. (image 6-6)
2. Do you want to start from the default PCF file?
If yes, click on the Yes button.

6. PCF Editor
The settings of the default PCF file will be loaded.

These settings are:
Active Area Size Width: 0

Height:0, the system uses the entire active input.
Aspect Ratio: Automatic, the system assumes square pixels.
X Offset: 0
Y Offset: 0
Anti Log LUT One Parametric value applied to all three colors: 1.00
Color Space YcbCr:
C1: C2: C3: G in offset: 0.0625 G offset: 0.00

1.1642 -0.5432 -0.2566
R in offset: 0.5000 R offset: 0.00
C4: C5: 1.7930 C6:
B in offset: 0.5000 B offset: 0.00
1.1642 0.0000
C8: 0.0000
C7: C9:
1.1642 1.0796
Gamma LUT One table applied to all three colors: Gamma 2.6
TCGD Data Green Yellow Red Ma- Blue Cyan White

genta
x 0.2650 0.4567 0.6650 0.3732 0.1400 0.1757 0.3140
y 0.6900 0.5220 0.3120 0.1777 0.0700 0.3371 0.3510
Y 51.34% 91.63% 15.04% 27.01% 7.81% 65.85% 100%
When working offline : no action will be done.
When working online : current active values will be used.
Image 6-6
New PCF file window
6.1.5.2 Starting from a existing PCF file on PC or projector

How to start
1. Click on the open file icon either on PC ( ) or projector ( ).
A browser window opens either on the PC file system or projector file system. (image 6-7)
2. Browse to the desired PCF file and click Open.
The settings of the PCF file will be loaded.

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-7
Browser window on PC file system
6.1.6 The use of the sliders

General
Every time an adjustment with sliders is used, the basic principle is the same. It will be explained hereafter
with one example adjustment.
Overview
• How to change the value of one color
• Changing the 3 color values simultaneously
• Bringing the 3 color values to the same level
6.1.6.1 How to change the value of one color

First method
1. Click on the slider bar of the specific color to activate. (image 6-8)
The complete slider bar will be selected within a rectangle.
2. Move the slider up or down until the desired value for that specific color is reached.
The value below the specific color will change accordingly.
If a preview window is available, it will change simultaneously. The values will be indicated on top of
the preview window for each color separately. (image 6-9)

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-8
Select one color
Image 6-9
Preview anti log change per color
Second method
1. Click on the up or down arrow keys until the desired value is reached.
The value next to the arrow keys will change accordingly.
The preview window will change simultaneously. The values will now be indicated for each color sep-
arately. (image 6-9)
Third method
1. Click inside the value input box.
2. Select the actual value and enter a new value with your keyboard.
The preview window will change simultaneously. The values will now be indicated for each color sep-
arately. (image 6-9)
6.1.6.2 Changing the 3 color values simultaneously

How to change
1. Check the link box (1). (image 6-10)
Tip: Changing first one color and then linking the colors together is possible.
All colors will react at the same time. The offset given to one color will be applied to the 3 colors.
2. Change the value of one color (2) with one of the methods described in "How to change the value of
one color", page 127.

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-10
Linking colors
6.1.6.3 Bringing the 3 color values to the same level

How to level
1. Check the link box (1). (image 6-11)
2. Click on the color with the value to which you want to level the others (2).
The slider bar will displayed inside a rectangle.
3. Double click on the slider of the selected color (3).
Both other color values will be leveled to the selected color value. (image 6-12)

Leveling 3 colors Result leveling
6.2 Active Area

Overview
• Introduction
• Loading from a separate file
• Active Area setup
• Saving the actual setting to a separate file

6. PCF Editor
6.2.1 Introduction
About Active Area
The active area within a source frame equals the relevant movie information within the movie stream. E.g.:
1280 x 1024 movie can be mastered in a 1920 x 1080 stream.
Only the 1280 x 1024 frame contains the relevant movie information. In this case, the active area is 1280
x 1024.
Source
frame
Width
Height
Active
area
Image 6-13
Active area indication
The active area setting is the first step within the processing path and is done on the original image. The
output is sent in 12 bit per color to the Anti Lookup table processing path.
12 12 12 12 12 12 16
Anti log
Active 3D Color
Table Correction
Image 6-14
Processing path : active area
The cinema processing path makes use of the size, offset, and aspect ratio parameters
available in this command, while the non-Cinema processing path makes use of the size
and offset parameters
6.2.2 Loading from a separate file

How to load
1. Click in the Active area File (SOURCE) box either the load icon from PC or the load icon from projector
. (image 6-15)
A browser window opens.
2. Select the desired .SOURCE file and click on Open.
The settings of the selected file will be loaded. The active area interface will be adapted accordingly.
Adjusting the values is still possible, see "Active Area setup", page 131.
Image 6-15
Active Area File box

6. PCF Editor
6.2.3 Active Area setup

What should be done
The Active area should be set to the relevant movie information.
When starting with the setup, the active area is set in the middle of the source frame. The active area can
be shifted horizontally and vertically until it matches the relevant movie information.
How to set up
1. Click on the up or down arrow keys to change the value for the width and height.
Or,
click in the input field, select the actual value and enter a new value with your keyboard
Or,
click on the slider and move the slider up or down until the desired value is reached. (image 6-16,
image 6-17)
2. Click on the up or down arrow keys to change the value for the horizontal and vertical center offset.
Or,
click in the input field, select the actual value and enter a new value with your keyboard
Or,
click on the slider and move the slider up or down until the desired value is reached.
The offset is referring to the center of the active area and to the center of the source frame. (image 6-18)
3. Select the corresponding aspect ratio by clicking on the drop down menu or fill out your own aspect
ratio by clicking in the input field and entering the desired value. (image 6-19)
Standard values can be selected out of the list.
When automatic is selected, the system assumes square pixels and calculates the aspect ratio based
on the Active Area Size.
A non standard value can be entered manually with the following mask #.##.
Image 6-16
Size adjustment Active area Image 6-17
Creating an active area
1 Source frame
2 Created active area
3 Relevant information area

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-19
Aspect ratio Active area
Image 6-18
Center offset indication
1 Source frame
2 Active area on source frame
A Horizontal offset
B Vertical offset
6.2.4 Saving the actual setting to a separate file

What is possible
The actual settings for the active area can be stored in a SOURCE file on the PC or when connected with
the projector, also on the projector.
How to store
1. Click on the PC save icon or on the projector save icon. (image 6-20)
A browser window appears. (image 6-21)
2. Browse to the desired location and fill out a file name.
3. Click on Save.
The file will have the extension SOURCE.
Image 6-20
Save active area

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-21
Save browser for SOURCE files
6.3 Anti Log Lookup Table

Overview
• Introduction
• Adjusting the actual values
• Saving the actual settings to a separate file
6.3.1 Introduction
About Anti log lookup table
An anti Log Lookup table is interesting for interfacing to logarithmic CINEON files. This table can then be
used to linearize the signal before it enters the resizer.
12 12 12 12 12 12 16
Anti log
Active 3D Color
Table Correction
Image 6-22
Processing path : Anti Lookup Table
The definition can be as parametric value or as a custom table.

How to load
1. Click in the Color LUT File (LUT-AL) box either the load icon from PC or the load icon from projector.
(image 6-23)
A browser window opens. (image 6-24)

6. PCF Editor
2. Select the desired .LUT-AL file and click on Open.

The settings of the selected file will be loaded. The anti log LUT interface will be adapted accordingly.
Adjusting the values is still possible, .
Image 6-23
Open an LUT_AL file
Image 6-24
Browser window for LUT-AL files
6.3.3 Adjusting the actual values

Overview
The following adjustments are possible
• Adjusting color per color
• Adjusting the linked colors
• Leveling the values to those of one specific color.

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-25
Adjusting the values for Anti log LUT
A preview in a separate window on the left is available during the adjustment.

For more explanation on how to adjust, see "The use of the sliders", page 127.
6.3.4 Saving the actual settings to a separate file

What is possible
The actual settings for the anti log lookup table can be stored in a LUT-AL file on the PC or when connected
with the projector, also on the projector.
How to store
3. Click on Save.
The file will have the extension LUT-AL.
Image 6-26
Save settings in separate file

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-27
Browser for saving LUT-AL files
6.4 Color Space Convertor

Overview
• Introduction
• Entering color space convertor matrix values
• Hardware settings
6.4.1 Introduction
Overview
Image 6-28
Overview Color Space convertor tab

6. PCF Editor
The original input color space (source colors) can be converted by 9 free coefficients C i and 3 offset coef-
ficient, one for each color. These 9 coefficients (C i) determine the relation between the input color space
and the output color space. When the coefficients on the diagonal from left up to right under are 1 and all
others are 0, then the input colors will be displayed as output colors if there is no offset.
G C1 C2 C3 G in - Gin offset Gout offset

R = C4 C5 C6 x R in - Rin offset + Rout offset
B C7 C8 C9 B in - Bin offset Bout offset
Image 6-29
The contrast, saturation, brightness and hue are modifiers applied on top of the C i and offset parameters.
The matrix is still used, as a base or starting point. The reason CSC files include Brightness, Contrast,
Saturation and Hue is that it gives the SCS creator the ability to ensure that they are all set to neutral
values. (neutral values are : contrast and saturation on 1, brightness and hue on 0).
Color space conversion takes place after resizing.
12 12 12 12 12 12 16
Anti log
Active 3D Color
Table Correction
Image 6-30
Processing path : Color space conversion

How to load
1. Click in the Color Space File (CSC) box either the load icon from PC or the load icon from projector.
(image 6-31)
2. Select the desired .CSC file and click on Open.
The settings of the selected file will be loaded. The Color space convertor interface will be adapted
accordingly.
Adjusting the values is still possible.
Image 6-31
Opening a CSC file

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-32
Browser for CSC files
6.4.3 Entering color space convertor matrix values

First method
1. Click into the input field of the value you want to change. (image 6-33)
The C values must be between -4.0000 and +4.0000.
The offset values must between 1.0000 and 0.0000.
Image 6-33
CSC values, direct entering
Second method
1. Click on the up or down arrow keys next to the digits until the desired value is reached. (image 6-34)
Image 6-34
CSC values, via scrolling
6.4.4 Hardware settings

Overview
• Overview of the different settings
• Possible adjustments

6. PCF Editor
6.4.4.1 Overview of the different settings

General
Image 6-35
Color space sliders overview
The values installed by the software sliders will be translated to the appropriate hardware setting. Each
setting is split up in the 3 color components.
Ranges for the different settings :
• Brightness : -0.5 to 0.5
• Contrast : 0 to 2
• Hue : -180 degree to 180 degree
• Saturation : 0 to 2
The hue control is only used in the YUV color space. In the standard procedure the 3 hue values would
be linked together as otherwise the color difference signals are no longer orthogonal.
The saturation values are normally linked together, but in some cases it can be useful to have a deviation.
6.4.4.2 Possible adjustments

Overview
The following adjustments are possible for each setting:
When using one of these adjustments the hardware will not perform the conversion as
indicated in the color space matrix.

What is possible
The actual settings for the Color Space Conversion can be stored in a CSC file on the PC or when con-
nected with the projector, also on the projector.
How to store

6. PCF Editor

3. Click on Save.
The file will have the extension CSC.
Image 6-36
Save to separate CSC file
Image 6-37
Save CSC file browser window
6.5 3D Lookup Table

Overview
• Introduction
6.5.1 Introduction
About
12 12 12 12 12 12 16
Anti log
Active 3D Color
Table Correction
Image 6-38
Processing path : Complex 3D lookup table
Color Correction in Post Production is done on a Digital Intermediate. In traditional systems, the film needs
to be plotted and projected on a 35mm system before a colorist can check the final film look.

6. PCF Editor
Film projector
Film Print
Film plotter
Screen
Digital
Intermediate
Screen
Workstation
DP30, DP50, DP100
3D Lut
Image 6-39
Film production
The process of plotting on a certain film stock and projecting it on a 35mm film results in a color transfor-
mation.
3D Color Lookup tables can be generated to simulate this process. If such a 3D Lookup tables is activated
in the projector, the projector output will match the projection of the 35mm print.
This allows the post house to check the final film look on a digital projector, without having to plot and
project a 35mm film.
To generate these 3D lookup tables, a set of film patches needs to be plotted. These patches have to be
projected on a film projector. These patches need to be measured on screen.
Also the behaviour of the DLP cinema projector needs to be modelled with a set of patches.
From the measurements taken on both systems one can create a 3D LUT.
The D-Cine Communicator does not have a GUI to generate 3D lookup tables. Custom 3D cubes can
be created by using the file format described in the Appendix. The custom tables can be uploaded and
activated by using the D-Cine Communicator file manager (Change view to LUT-CLUT). (see chapter "9.
File Manager", "Changing the view", page 174, select LUT_CLUT)
Instead of using a 3D cube, one can use a 1D Color transformation to match the 35mm process. This can
be done by creating a custom Gamma Lookup table. This process is also referred as Grayscale tracking.
(see chapter "6. PCF Editor", "Introduction", page 142, About Gray scale tracking)

6. PCF Editor
6.6 Gamma Lookup Table

Overview
• Introduction
• Creating you own gamma table
• Import Gamma table
• Loading a gamma curve from a separate file
• Adjusting the actual values
6.6.1 Introduction
About
De-Gamma lookup tables are used to linearize the signal before it enters the P7 color space correction.
Or, it can also be used to accentuate some particular parts in the color space.
12 12 12 12 12 12 16
Anti log
Active 3D Color
Table Correction
Image 6-40
Processing path : De-Gamma lookup table
About Gray scale tracking

First refer to see chapter "6. PCF Editor", "Introduction", page 140 before continuing.
Instead of using a 3D cube, one can use a 1D Color transformation to match the 35mm process. This can
be done by creating a custom Gamma Lookup table. This process is also referred as Grayscale tracking.
6.6.2 Creating you own gamma table

Introduction
A set of film patches must be created with values that range from 1 (represents a full black screen) to 1024
(represents a full white image). This patch of different gray scale images must be printed on a 35 mm film
and projected with a 35 mm film projector. For each gray scale value, the luminance must be measured.
To calculate a corresponding gamma lookup table, an Excel spreadsheet is provided.
Steps to be taken
1. Create a patch of different gray scale image.
2. Plot this patch on a 35 mm film.
3. Project the film with a 35 mm film projector.
4. Measure the luminance for each gray scale value.
5. Open the Excel sheet Makelut.xls and enable macros. (image 6-41)
Note: Check in Tools > AddIns if Analyse ToolPak and Solver Add-in are checked.
6. Enter the gray scale value in column 1 and the measured value in column 2. (image 6-42)
7. Click on Save LUT.
Tip: Use the page buttons at the bottom of the page to see a chart overview.

6. PCF Editor
The makelut.txt file will be generated. (image 6-43)

This file can be imported.
Image 6-41
Enable macros
Image 6-42
Gray scale Excel sheet
Image 6-43
Fragment of makelut.txt

6. PCF Editor
If the result curve shows in some areas a little kink, make more measurement in that
area to fine tune.
Image 6-44
Result graphic
6.6.3 Import Gamma table

What is possible?
Any special gamma curve which is created in a separate file (table) can be imported and added to the
actual PCF file.
Steps to be taken
1. Click on Import Gamma Table. (image 6-45)
The Import Gamma Table window will be displayed. (image 6-46)
2. Click on Select Source File button.
An import browser will be displayed. (image 6-47)
3. Select the desired gamma LUT txt file and click on Open.
The file must be a txt file and it must contain 4096 16-bit values, in hexadecimal format (MSB first LSB
last) space separated.
The selected file name appears in the Source File input field.
4. This file should be converted to a PC file or Projector active configuration. Click on the desired radio
button.
Note: Both selection are only available when working online. For offline working only conversion to PC
file is possible.
5. Click on Convert now.

6. PCF Editor
The selected gamma LUT txt file will be converted.

A curve preview will be given in the gamma LUT tab. (image 6-48)
An indication will be written above the slider bars: Gamma custom table used. Values below not rele-
vant !
Image 6-45
Import Gamma Table Image 6-46
Import gamma table window
Image 6-47
Import browser

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-48
Imported table created with the excel sheet
6.6.4 Loading a gamma curve from a separate file

How to load
1. Click in the Gamma LUT File (LUT-DG) box either the load icon from PC or the load icon from projector.
(image 6-49)
2. Select the desired LUT_DG file and click on Open.
The settings of the selected file will be loaded. The Color space convertor interface will be adapted
accordingly.
Adjusting the values is still possible.
Image 6-49
Open LUT-DG file
6.6.5 Adjusting the actual values

Overview
The following adjustments are possible
A preview in a separate window on the left is available during the adjustment.
On top of the sliders appears the message Gamma parametric value used.

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-50
Adjusting Gamma curve

What is possible
The actual settings for the DeGamma correction can be stored in a LUT-DG file on the PC or when con-
nected with the projector, also on the projector.
How to store
3. Click on Save.
The file will have the extension LUT-DG.
Image 6-51
Save to separate LUT–DG file

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-52
Save file browser
6.7 Target Color Gamut (P7)
TCGD
Target Color Gamut Data
Overview
• Introduction
• Color selection
• Color coordinate of a point
• Gain (luminance) of a color
• White point adjustment in Normal mode
• White Point Tolerance Box
• White Clipping Mode
• Adding a Remark or Copyright notice
6.7.1 Introduction
Overview
The projector’s 3 primary, 3 secondary color points and the white point can be defined independently in
Normal mode. The White Clipping point can be defined in the White Clipping mode. This is what is called
the P7 color correction scheme.
Conventional system designs have three primaries. The electronics of these systems can control only the
primaries and white through the use of degamma or a 3x3 matrix. If the white or primary point is moved,
then the secondaries are constrained to move with the white point.
The seven primary system (P7) however allows for the primaries and secondaries and white to move
independently!
The Native color coordinates for the projected primary colors have to be measured on screen. The projec-
tor’s native colors will be different from setup to setup. This is due to the reflection on the screen, due to
the influence of the glass between the projection booth and the theatre or other environmental parameters.

6. PCF Editor
These measured native color coordinates are references for the projector and will be entered so that the
projector knows how its primary native colors are projected on the screen. These measured colors are
stored into MCGD files.
The color corrected P7 points can move within the triangle of the native points. The P7 data can be found
in a TCGD File.
The square points on the chromaticity diagram represent the native colors of the projector. These points
are obtained via the Measure Color Gamut measuring in the Color Gamut tab. The triangle between these
points represent the color gamut (colors) that the projector can project.
Image 6-53
Chromaticity diagram
Note that it is common practice to set the targets outside the native gamut (P7v2 does this with Cyan and
Yellow). This implies there would be clipping if a fully saturated input was applied. In normal scenes, this
does not happen, and the extra gain or saturation helps balance the overall look. If clipping occurs, the
output section of P7 clips R, G and B separately. This means that there will typically be a hue shift when
one of R, G, B goes into clip ahead of the others. Another way of describing this is that as a color trajectory
hits the gamut boundary (of the projector optics), it will make a sharp turn and follow the gamut boundary,
rather than increasing in saturation. This is similar to the way film and other RGB systems clip.
The circular points represent the corrected colors. These corrected colors are the desired colors to project
a specific movie. All six points can be moved in any direction to obtain the desired value.
The white point can be defined exactly (as one point) or within a tolerance box.
Native colors
Native colors are the colors without color correction
6.7.2 Color selection

First method
1. Click on one of the circular point in the chromaticity diagram. (image 6-54)
The background of the point changes from gray to white. The corresponding color in the color coordi-
nate box will be seen as pressed.

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-54
Color point selected
Second method
1. Click on the color names (buttons) in the color coordinate box. (image 6-55)
The button will be seen as pressed. The background of the corresponding point on the chromaticity
diagram will change from gray to white.
Image 6-55
Color coordinate box : cyan selected
Third method
1. Click on a color in the bar chart box. (image 6-56)
The background of the corresponding point on the chromaticity diagram will change from gray to white.
The corresponding color button in the coordinate box will be seen as pressed.
Image 6-56
Histogram box : cyan selected
6.7.3 Color coordinate of a point

First method
1. Select a color.
The actual color coordinates and gain will be filled out in the Color coordinates change box.
2. Click on the up or down arrow to change the y-value.
Click on the left or right arrow to change the x-value. (image 6-57)
The corresponding color point in the chromaticity diagram moves immediately in the same direction.

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-57
Coordinate change box
Second method
1. Select a color.
2. Click on the up or down keys next to the x or y field to change the value. (image 6-58)
The corresponding color point in the chromaticity diagram moves immediately in the same direction.
Image 6-58
Coordinate change box : change coordinate
Third method
1. Select a color.
2. Click in the input field and select the actual value. (image 6-59)
3. Enter the new value with your keyboard.
Image 6-59
Coordinate change box : change value

6. PCF Editor
6.7.4 Gain (luminance) of a color

About
In Normal mode, the gains or luminances of the colors are normalized to the luminance of white. Lowering
the gain of white will increase the gain of the other colors.
In White Clipping Mode, the gains of luminances of the colors are normalized to the luminance of white
clip (W-clip). Lowering the gain of W-clip will increase the gain of the other colors, including white. When
in White Clipping Mode, the gain of white can be changed individually without influencing the gain of the
other colors.
First method
1. Select a color.
2. Click on the slider of the gain in the Change coordinate box and move up or down to change the value.
(image 6-60)
Up : higher value
Down : lower value
The value is given in comparison to white.
The changes will be seen also in the luminance histogram box and in the color coordinate box.
Image 6-60
Gain change via slider
Second method
1. Select a color.
2. Click on the up or down arrow keys next to the gain value. (image 6-61)
Up : higher value
Down : lower value
The value is given in comparison to white.
The changes will be seen also in the luminance bar chart box and in the color coordinate box.

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-61
Gain change via up/down arrows
Third method
1. Select a color.
2. Click in the input field and select the actual value. (image 6-62)
3. Enter a new value with your keyboard.
Image 6-62
Gain change via input value
6.7.5 White point adjustment in Normal mode

Step to be taken
1. Select first Normal mode in White point operating mode pane. (image 6-63)
2. Select White in the same way as you can select a color.
The color coordinates of white will be filled out in the White point coordinates box (1). The equivalent
in degree Kelvin on the Daylightlocus or D-illuminant curve is filled out in the temperature field (2).
A delta value is calculated (3). The delta value is the orthogonal distance between the white point and
the D-illuminant curve. (image 6-64)
3. Change the white point coordinates as you change the color coordinates of another color, see "Color
coordinate of a point", page 150
The corresponding temperature value changes accordingly.
Or,
change the temperature value to the desired value by clicking on the up/down arrow or by entering the
new value with the keyboard.
The coordinates for the chosen white point change accordingly.
4. Change the gain for white in the same way as for the other colors, see "Gain (luminance) of a color",
page 152

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-63
White point operation mode: normal
Image 6-64
White point coordinates
About Delta value

The Delta value expresses the deviation of the point (x,y) towards the D-illuminant curve, measured on
the isotemperature lines through that white point on the (u,v) chromaticity diagram.
Delta (∆) is positive if the point is positioned above the D-illuminant curve and negative when below this
curve.
D-illuminance curve
(x,y)
<0
>0
Isotemperature lines
x
Image 6-65
Delta value
∆ is expressed in (u,v) units.
6.7.6 White Point Tolerance Box

Why used
The white point tolerance box defines a region (four corners of a tolerance box) within which the corrected
white point can vary. The corrected white point will always move to the nearest possible point to the native
white point, but it will always remain within the tolerance box.
A white point tolerance box is introduced to loose a minimum of light when white point color correction is
performed. The maximum light output is obtained when the white point of the movie matches the native
white point of the projector.

6. PCF Editor
D-illuminance curve
Native white point
Correcte white point
x
Image 6-66
Tolerance box and corrected white point
The four corner points of the white point tolerance box must be entered in an order such that the lines of
the box do not cross each other. E.g. enter clockwise or anti-clockwise.
How to setup a tolerance box

1. Check first the use of the tolerance box (1). (image 6-67)
Note: When checked, the x, y coordinates entered in the white point coordinates box will not be used
anymore.
2. Select point 1, first corner of the tolerance box (2).
The color coordinates and corresponding temperature will be filled out in the White point coordinates
box.
3. Change the value in the same way as for the white point, see "White point adjustment in Normal mode",
page 153.
The result of the movement will be seen in the inlay of the chromaticity diagram. (image 6-68)
4. Repeat for step 2 for the other 3 corner points.
Image 6-67
White point tolerance box

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-68
Chromaticity diagram: white point tolerance box
6.7.7 White Clipping Mode

About White Clip
In addition to the TCGD white point, there can optionally be a ’White Clip’ point. This point is used for the
gain normalization, instead of the white point. This is useful for large gamut encoding systems, such as
XYZ, where the encoding white point (Illuminant E at x,y=0.333,0.333) is not the white point of the image
data (which is nominally 0.314, 0.351 for digital cinema). If this were not done, the normalization would
cause the projector to lose 15% to 25% of its contrast and dynamic range.
The white clip point can also specify a luminance. This allows further adjustment of overall P7 gain. This
can be used in post-production to match the luminance of several TCGDs, without adjusting lamp current.
In white clipping mode the white point gain can be changed without changing the gain of primary and
secondary colors. The gain of the primary and secondary points is normalized to the gain of the white
clipping point. In normal operating mode the gain of primary and secondary points are normalized to the
gain of the white point.
White point adjustment of White clip

Select first White Clipping Mode in White Point Operating Mode pane.
Image 6-69
White Clipping Mode selected

6. PCF Editor
Image 6-70
Chromaticity diagram White Clip
A White point
B White clip point
Adjust the white point in the same way as for Normal mode, see "White point adjustment in Normal mode",
page 153.
6.7.8 Adding a Remark or Copyright notice

Steps to be taken
1. Click in the input field next to Remark / Copyright notice. (image 6-71)
2. Fill out a desired text with your keyboard.
Note: Comment can be used as reference. This comment has no use by the projector.
Image 6-71
Remark / copyright

6. PCF Editor

7. Projector Tests
7. PROJECTOR TESTS
Overview
• General Purpose Outputs
• Ethernet test
• Test Patterns
• Port 292 error counts
• Self Test
7.1 General Purpose Outputs

What can be done?
The general purpose outputs (GPO) for DB37 are the standard GPOs.
The general purpose outputs (GPO) can be high, low or toggle.
How to set up
1. Click on the icons to set the status of the GPO. When the icon is on a white field, it is clickable and
becomes active.
set low (make output low)
set high (make output high)
toggle (toggle the output from high to low or from low to high
continues toggle (toggles the output continuously between high and low or vice versa
The result of the selection is indicated in the status column.
7.2 Ethernet test

How to realize
1. Fill out the Ethernet address of the device you want to ping to. A ping goes from the projector to the
other device. (image 7-1)
2. Click on the graphic icon to start the ping test. (image 7-2)
When the ping test is successful, a message will be displayed. (image 7-3)
when the ping test is not successful, the message ping failed will be displayed. (image 7-4)
Image 7-1
Ethernet test : fill out the address

7. Projector Tests
Image 7-2 Image 7-3

Starting the Ethernet test Ping successfully
Image 7-4
Ping fail message
7.3 Test Patterns

Overview
• Changing a test pattern
• Clear the projected test pattern
7.3.1 Changing a test pattern
The default test patterns are in the RGB color space. The color space option is by default
RGB. If a test pattern with YCbCr color space is uploaded, select first YCbCr otherwise
the pattern will be displayed in wrong way.
How to change
1. Click on Change test pattern. (image 7-5)
A retrieving window appears for a while until a file manager with the list of patterns is displayed. (im-
age 7-6, image 7-7)
2. Select a test pattern out of the list.
3. Click on Select.
A loading window appears and the test pattern will be displayed. The name of the pattern will be fill out
in the field Test pattern currently displayed. (image 7-8, image 7-9)
Image 7-6
Retrieving test pattern
Image 7-5
Change test pattern selected

7. Projector Tests
Image 7-8
Loading test patterns
Image 7-7
List of test patterns
Image 7-9
Test pattern displayed.
When the actual color space is different from the color space of the test pattern due to
external settings or due to loading a typical PFC file or CSC-0 or CSC-1 file, the color
space will be switched to the color space of the test pattern .
When clearing a test pattern everything will be set back to the original settings except
masking, resizing and anamorphic lens factor.
Pattern shortcuts
10 predefined test patterns can be quickly selected via the shortcuts.
1. Click on one of the 10 predefined test pattern shortcuts. (image 7-10)
The selected test pattern will be displayed. The button will be in the pressed state.
2. To clear the test pattern, click a second time on the pressed button
Or,
click on the Clear test pattern button.
The test pattern will be removed.

7. Projector Tests
Image 7-10
Test pattern shortcuts
7.3.2 Clear the projected test pattern

How to clear
1. Click on Clear test pattern. (image 7-11)
A warning message will be displayed to indicate that any projector configuration changes made while a
test pattern was enabled are not saved into the ACTIVE configuration, and will be lost when clearing the
test pattern (except resizing and masking). Settings will be set back to the original settings as before
the test pattern was selected. Settings on resizing and masking will remain active. If you want to save
these configuration settings save them first in a file via the file manager. (image 7-12)
The test pattern will be removed from the screen.
2. Do you want to save the settings ?
If yes, Click No, cancel this action and continue with saving procedure in File manager.
If no, click Yes.
A remove test pattern message will be displayed. (image 7-13)
Image 7-11
Clear test pattern
Image 7-13
Removing test pattern
Image 7-12
Clear test pattern warning

7. Projector Tests
7.4 Port 292 error counts

Overview
Total Error Count includes all reported errors on the source input ports A and B since the system was last
reset or power-cycled.
Recent Error Count includes all reported errors in the last 60 seconds on the source input ports A and B.
Image 7-14
Error count on port 292 A & B
If you check Continuous update, the error count will be update every 300 milliseconds.
7.5 Self Test

7.5.1 Start up of the self tests setup
How to start up?
1. Click on Self Tests. (image 7-15)
The self tests selection window pops up. (image 7-16)
Image 7-15
Start up Self tests setup

7. Projector Tests
Image 7-16
Self test setup

7. Projector Tests
7.5.2 Self tests choices

Overview tests
All self tests
All Interface Board Tests
Interface FPGA register test
Interface Frame Store test
Interface ANC-FIFO test
Interface RTC test

Interface Trusted Platform Module
Interface Processor / Connection

test
All processor tests
Processor Datapath test
Processor LUT-CLUT test
Processor LUT-DG test

Formatter test
When selecting a test from the first column, all underlaying test from column 2 and 3 are executed. When
selecting a test from column 2, the underlaying tests from column 3 are executed.
Additional information on the results of the self test can be found in the status tab.

7. Projector Tests

8. Color Calibration
8. COLOR CALIBRATION
Overview
• Introduction to Color Calibration
• Color Correction
8.1 Introduction to Color Calibration

Overview
The color coordinates for the projected primary colors must be measured on the screen. The values can
be different than those originally inside the projector due to reflection on the screen or due to the influence
of the glass between the projection booth and the theatre and even the projected colors are different from
setup to setup.
These measured color coordinates are references for the projector and will be entered so that the projector
knows how its colors are projected on the screen.
This reference measuring, together with the delivered gamut file of the film will introduce a color correction
so that the film will be projected with the correct color settings.
8.2 Color Correction

Overview
• Color Correction Process
• Color Measuring
• Installing a Target Color Gamut file
• Verifying the colors after correction
8.2.1 Color Correction Process

Step to be taken
1. Measuring of the color gamut of the projector.
2. Select a target color gamut file or upload a target color gamut file.
3. Verify the colors on screen after correction (optional step).
While executing step 2, the previous color corrections on the projector will be removed.
3D tables are bypassed.
When standard processing is selected the cinema color correction is not valid. The
active TCGD data is not taken into account.

8.2.2 Color Measuring
CAUTION: Set anamorphic lens factor to 1.0 before starting the color measuring.
How to measure
1. Click on Measure Color Gamut. (image 8-1)
The Color Gamut Measurement window will be displayed showing the actual color values. (image 8-2)
2. Select a color by clicking on the color name. (image 8-3)
A loading color test pattern message will be displayed. After a while, the selected color will be projected
without any color correction on the screen. (image 8-4)
The selected input fields of that specific color becomes white.
3. Measure the color coordinates for that specific color.
4. Enter the measured coordinates in the white input fields. Enter just the digits of the decimal value.
5. Repeat this procedure for the other colors and for white by starting at step 2.
6. Do you want to use the color calibration values in a macro file?
If yes, press Save to file (image 8-3).
Tip: This is handy when using the same projector for normal cinema projection and for 3D cinema
projection. The color calibration can then be done via a macro file but first, both color calibration
files must be saved.
The Save measured colors to file window opens.
If no, continue with step 8.
7. Enter a name in the Filename input field and press Save.
The color values will be stored for later use.
8. To use the measured values immediately, press now Apply and Exit (image 8-3).
Note: It is still possible to return to the previous coordinates by clicking Cancel.
The measured values are written to file and become active. (image 8-5)
9. Set the anamorphic lens factor back to its original value.
Image 8-1
Selecting Measure Color Gamut

Image 8-2
Color Gamut Measurement window
Image 8-3
Color Gamut Measurement Red selected
Image 8-4
Loading test pattern message
Image 8-5
Values successfully applied
8.2.3 Installing a Target Color Gamut file
TCGD
Target Color Gamut Data. These files defines the Target Color Gamut. For each movie, it is
possible to select a ’Target’ Color Gamut File, which defines the color gamut values for that
specific movie. The TCGD file is part of the PCF file delivered with the movie.
Selecting a target file inside the projector

1. Click on Select Target Color Gamut file. (image 8-6)
A retrieve list message will be displayed and after a while the file list comes up. (image 8-7, image 8-8)
2. Select a file out of the list.
3. Click Select.

An adjust gamut message will be displayed. (image 8-9)

4. Click Proceed to continue.
Click Cancel to return to the selection window.
The selected file will be made active. (image 8-10)
Image 8-6
Selecting Target Color Gamut file
Image 8-7
Retrieving color gamut files
Image 8-8
Overview color gamut files
Image 8-10
File active message
Image 8-9
Adjust color gamut message
Uploading a target file from a PC.

1. Click on Upload Target Color Gamut file. (image 8-11)
2. Select the desired TCGD file on your file system and click Open.
The file will be loaded to the projector and will be made active.

Image 8-11
Selecting Target Color Gamut file
Image 8-12
Browser window to TCGD files
8.2.4 Verifying the colors after correction
CAUTION: Set anamorphic factor to 1.0 before verifying the colors after correction.
Overview
The color coordinates of the projected image after correction can be verified by measuring the coordinates
on the screen again. The measured values should be the values as indicated on the interface.
This part of the color correction procedure is optional.
How to verify
1. Click on Verify Color Gamut. (image 8-13)
The verify color gamut window opens. (image 8-14)
2. Select a color button.

A loading message will be displayed.

The selected color will be displayed on the screen with color correction.
3. Measure the coordinates with a colorimeter on the screen and check with the values below the color
bottom.
4. Repeat this procedure for other colors, starting by step 2.
5. When finished, click on Remove Color.
A remove color pattern message will be displayed. (image 8-15)
The color pattern will be removed.
6. Set the anamorphic lens factor back to its original value.
Image 8-13
Select Verify Color Gamut
Image 8-14
Verify color window
Image 8-15
Remove test pattern

9. File Manager
9. FILE MANAGER
Overview
• Introduction
• Internal file system
• File Upload
• File Download
• Actions on Projector files
• Backup the file system
• Restore the file system
9.1 Introduction
Overview
The D-Cine Premiere makes use of an internal “disk chip”. This chip contains a file system that can han-
dled in a similar way as a file system on PC. That allows the D-Cine Premiere to make use of files and
directory structures similar to those found on a PC.
The D-Cine Premiere stores the state of the projector in something called ACTIVE. ACTIVE can be com-
pared with a file. Changes made to the projector are immediately reflected in ACTIVE. So ACTIVE always
represents the current state of the system. When powering up the latest state will be restored.
Within the interface it is possible to manage the internal file system and the ACTIVE configuration.
ACTIVE
Stores the current state of the projector.
9.2 Internal file system
CSC
Color Space Converter
Overview
• Changing the view
• Renaming files and folders
• Deleting files and directory
• Creating a new folder
• Navigation through folders
• Changing the attribute setting
Overview
The default view is the “Directory Structure” view.

9. File Manager
Image 9-1
Default projector file system view
The same manipulation can be done as on a normal file system of a PC.

The files are shown with extensions in the Directory Structure view.
9.2.1 Changing the view

How to change
1. Click on Change View ==>.
The file or structure show window pops up. (image 9-2)
The radio button in front of Show Directory Structure will be selected.
With Show Directory Structure selected, the file extension will be displayed too. For all others, the file
extensions are hidden.
2. Select a mode and click on OK.
The following mode are possible:
Mode Explanation
CSC Color Space Converter

Defines the Color Space to be used. It can be RGB or YcbCr.
TCGD Target Color Gamut Data

These files defines the Target Color Gamut. For each movie, it is possible to
select a ’Target’ Color Gamut File, which defines the color gamut values for that
specific movie.
Together with the measured color coordinates of the projector, the corrections for
the projector are calculated so that the color gamut of the movie is reached.
LUT-AL Anti logarithmic lookup table.
LUT-DG De-Gamma Lookup table.
LUT-CLUT Complex LUT lookup table.

9. File Manager
Mode Explanation
SOURCE Source information.

Source file defines the capture configuration of the data presented to the input
port.
Number of Columns/Rows that refer to the sub-image (or active area) that is to
be captured from the active data input stream.
Offset information: shifts the offset of the active area. Image aspect ratio of the
active area.
Everything that can be configured with the Projector configuration tab in the
D-Cine Communicator package, can be saved in a Source File.
PCF Projector Configuration File. This file is a file that will be delivered with each
movie. It contains all data needed to display a certain movie as it is defined by
the movie distributor.
This file includes :
• LUT-CLUT data
• LUT-AL data
• LUT-DG data
• Color Space Convertor data
• Target Color Gamut data
• Source data
MCGD Measured color Gamut Data

This file contains the measured color gamut data (color reference values) for a
specific projector installation. This type of file can be created with the ’measure
color gamut’ function in the color gamut tab.
CSC-P7 Color Space Convertor – P7

Normal projector use has the CSC-P7 values calculated based on MCGD and
TCGD parameters. Therefore, downloading CSC-P7 values is typically done for
debug purposes, rather than normal operation.

9. File Manager
Mode Explanation
EXTRA Extra files can contain the following information:
Source selection
• Port 292-A Source Type and Packing
• Port 292-B Source Type and Packing
• Port 292-Dual Source Type and Packing
• Port DVI-A Source Type and Packing
• Port DVI-B Source Type and Packing
• Port DVI-Dual/Twin Source Type and Packing
Processing Path Select
Advanced source settings
• SMPTE Field Bit
• 3:2 Pull-Down Enable
• Pull-Down Offset
• Pull-Down Re-Synchronization
• SMPTE 291 Disable
Image Orientation Select
Settings not accessible through the D-Cine Communicator:
• Vertical Frequency Offset
• Vertical Frequency (lsb)
• Vertical Frequency (msb)
Image Filter/Scaler Disable
GPI Configuration
3D setting
• Frame Rate Multiplication
• 3D Control commands (All)
SCREEN Screen presentation configuration

These type of files include:
• Resizing information
• Letterboxing information
• Masking information
• Anamorphic factor of projector lens information
All information in the SCREEN file can be set with the Resizing, Masking and
Lens Type interface on the projector configuration tab.
MACRO Macro files

Macro files contain a sequence of commands that need to be executed when
executing the macro file.
TGA Targa Bitmap files

These files are typically used as test patterns.
The D-Cine Premiere supports the TGA™ format as specified by TrueVision
TGA™, File Format Specification, V2.0 with some restrictions. See next table
for these restrictions.

9. File Manager
Restriction to the TGA format:
Color Space Bits/Color Sampling Total Bits

w/ alpha3 w/o alpha
RGB 8 4:4:4 32 24
RGB 12 4:4:4 48 36
YC bC r 8 4:4:4 32 24
YC bC r 12 4:4:4 48 36
YC bC r 8 4:2:2 - 16
YC bC r 12 4:2:2 - 24
Image 9-2
File or structure selection window
9.2.2 Renaming files and folders

How to rename
1. Right click on a file or folder.
A pop up menu pops up. (image 9-3)
2. Select Rename.
The Rename dialog box pops up. (image 9-4)
3. Fill out the new name in the input field.
Note: File attributes must allow this action.
4. Click OK to rename the file or folder.
Image 9-4
Rename dialog box
Image 9-3
Renaming files and folders
9.2.3 Deleting files and directory

How to delete
1. Right click on a file or directory.
3. Alpa data is ignored for test patterns.

9. File Manager
2. Select Delete.
Note: File attributes must allow this action.
Note: To delete a directory, the directory should be empty.
A confirmation window pops up. (image 9-6)
3. Click OK to confirm.
Image 9-6
Delete confirmation
Image 9-5
Deleting a file or directory
9.2.4 Creating a new folder

How to create
1. Right click over an empty space.
2. Select New folder.
The new folder creation menu pops up. (image 9-8)
3. Fill out the name of the new folder and click OK.
The new folder is created.
Image 9-8
New folder pop up
Image 9-7
Creation of new folder
9.2.5 Navigation through folders

Navigation
The same functionality is possible as in a PC environment.
Double click on a folder to open this folder.
9.2.6 Changing the attribute setting
Changing the attribute setting is only possible in Directory Structure View.

9. File Manager
How to change
1. Right click on a file.
A pop menu pops up. (image 9-9)
2. Select Changing Attributes.
The attribute window opens. (image 9-10)
3. Check the attributes you want to set and click OK.
Image 9-9
Selecting Changing Attributes
Image 9-10
Attribute window
9.3 File Upload
File upload are best done in the typical view. Checks on type and size will be executed.
How to upload
1. Change first the view to the specific view of the file you want to upload. see "Changing the view", page
174.
2. Select a file or select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl button on the PC file system.
3. Click on ==Upload==>. (image 9-11)
The file or files will be copied to the internal file system on the selected location. Checks on file type
and size will be executed.

9. File Manager
Image 9-11
Uploading file or files
9.4 File Download

How to download
1. Select a folder on the PC file system to which the file must be downloaded.
2. Select a file or select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl button on the internal file system.
3. Click on <==DownLoad==. (image 9-12)
The file or files will be copied to the PC file system on the selected location.
Image 9-12
Download file or files

9. File Manager
9.5 Actions on Projector files

Overview
• Save from ACTIVE
• Select ACTIVE
• Write ACTIVE Direct
• Read from ACTIVE
• Read Files Active
• Executing a Macro file
9.5.1 Save from ACTIVE

What can be done?
The ACTIVE configuration or parts of the configuration can be saved on the internal file system. E.g. the
screen configuration (masking, resizing and letterboxing) can be saved in Screen File. This example will
be used to show the procedure. All other types can be saved in the same way.
How to save
1. Click first on Change View. (image 9-13)
2. Select first the typical directory, e.g. SCREEN, to save these typical settings and click OK. (image 9-14)
Note: TGA and MACRO are not allowed.
3. Click on Save from Active. (image 9-15)
Note: When in directory structure view while clicking on Save From Active, a message will be displayed.
(image 9-16)
The Save input window opens. (image 9-17)
4. Fill out a name for the file and click OK.
The Active will be saved.
Image 9-13
Change view internal file system

9. File Manager
Image 9-14
View selection internal file system
Image 9-15
Save from active selected
Image 9-16
Image 9-17
Message Directory structure view
Save from Active input
9.5.2 Select ACTIVE

What can be done?
A saved configuration on the internal file system can be loaded as ACTIVE. This configuration will be the
new configuration of the D-Cine Premiere.
How to select
2. Select first the typical directory, e.g. SCREEN, to select these typical settings and click OK. (image 9-19)
3. Select a file out of the list.
4. Click on Select Active. (image 9-20)
Note: When in directory structure view while clicking on Select Active, a message will be displayed.
(image 9-21)
A confirmation screen will be displayed. (image 9-22)
If yes, Click Yes
The configuration will be loaded for the internal file system to ACTIVE. A successful message will be
displayed. (image 9-23)
If no, Click No, cancel the operation.
The operation is canceled, the selected file will not become active.

9. File Manager
Image 9-18
Change view selected
Image 9-19
Select SCREEN
Image 9-20
“Select Active” selected
Image 9-21
Message Directory structure view
Image 9-23
Image 9-22 Select active successfully
Select active confirmation window

9. File Manager
9.5.3 Write ACTIVE Direct

What can be done?
A stored file on the PC file system can be written to ACTIVE. The type of file that can be written to ACTIVE
is determined by the View selection in the internal file system.
How to write
1. Click first on Change View.(image 9-13, image 9-24)
2. Select first the typical directory, e.g. SCREEN, corresponding to the file you want to write directly to
ACTIVE and click OK. (image 9-25)
3. Select a file on the PC file system.
4. Click on Write Active Direct. (image 9-26)
- If the corresponding file extension does not match the selected internal directory type and the file is
a valid file for Write Active Direct, the message “Only files with the extension SCREEN e.g. can be
used”. (image 9-27)
- While clicking on Write Active Direct and the internal file system is still in the directory structure, a
message as followed will be displayed : “You cannot perform a write active direct action this type of
configuration” (image 9-28)
- When the extension corresponds with the internal file structure view, a confirmation message will be
displayed. (image 9-29)
If yes, Click Yes.
The file will be written to ACTIVE. A success message will be displayed. (image 9-30)
If no, click No, cancel operation.
Image 9-24
Select Change View
Image 9-25
Select SCREEN

9. File Manager
Image 9-26
Write Active Direct selected
Image 9-27
Image 9-28
Type message
Directory structure error
Image 9-29
Confirmation of Write Active Direct Image 9-30
Success message while writing to ACTIVE
9.5.4 Read from ACTIVE

What can be done?
A specific configuration will be saved to a PC file. The type of file that can be written to a PC is determined
by the View selection in the internal file system.
How to save
2. Select first the typical directory, e.g. SCREEN, corresponding to the configuration file you want to write
to the PC from ACTIVE and click OK. (image 9-32)
3. Select a directory on the PC file system.
4. Click on Read From Active. (image 9-33)
- If the internal file system is still on the ’directory structure’ view, the message that you cannot read
from active while in the directory structure will be displayed. (image 9-34)
- If the internal view is correct, an input box will be displayed to enter a file name. (image 9-35)
5. Enter a file name without extension and click OK.
The configuration will be written to the PC file system.

9. File Manager
Image 9-31
Select Change View
Image 9-32
Select SCREEN
Image 9-33
Select Read from Active

Directory structure message Input box for file name
9.5.5 Read Files Active

What can be done ?
The actual active files are indicated. When some modifications are done to one of these files, this will be
indicated in the list.

9. File Manager
The following information is given:

• PCF file with all its sub information files.
• SCREEN
• MCGD
• CSC-P7
• EXTRA
Normally a file name is returned next to the items, but in certain cases the following non-filenames will be
returned:
<DEFAULT> Default data was used
<DIRECT> Write Active Direct command was used, from PC data
<CALCULATED> Typical return for CSC-P7 data, since this data is calculated each time new
MCGD or TCGD data is entered.
<COLORS-MIXED> Used for LUT-AL and LUT-DG when ACTIVE updated with a file for only
one color.
<TESTPATTERN> Used for SOURCE and CSC data when set to test pattern values. SOURCE
data can not be changed when a test pattern is displayed. CSC data can
be temporarily changed when a test pattern is displayed, but will revert to
previous user settings when test pattern is turned off.
<METADATA> Data set by Metadata function
How to get an overview of the active files ?

1. Click on Read Files Active. (image 9-36)
The active file window opens. (image 9-37)
Image 9-36
Select Files Active
Image 9-37
Files Active window

9. File Manager
9.5.6 Executing a Macro file

What can be done?
A macro file stored on the internal file system of the D-Cine Premiere can be execute when in the macro
view.
How to execute
2. Select MACRO and click OK. (image 9-39)
3. Select a macro file you want to execute.
4. Click on Execute Macro. (image 9-40)
- If the macro view is not selected, a message to warn that you cannot execute a macro in this view
will be displayed. (image 9-41)
- If the view is correct and a macro file is selected, a confirmation window will be displayed. (im-
age 9-42)
5. Do you want to continue.
If yes, Click on Yes
The macro will be execute and a message successful executed will be displayed.
If not successful, see logging information for more details. (image 9-43)
If no, Click on No, cancel the action.
No macro will be executed.
Image 9-38
Select Change View
Image 9-39

9. File Manager
Image 9-40
Execute macro selected

Wrong View message Execute Macro Confirmation window
Image 9-43
Successfully executed message
To edit a macro, see "Macro Editor", page 265.
9.6 Backup the file system

What can be done?
Backup takes a complete backup of the internal file system of the D-Cine Premiere, including ACTIVE.
It is preferable to use in the first place an Ethernet connection or in the second place a
direct RS232 connection to backup.
How to backup
1. Press Backup/Restore. (image 9-44)
The Backup/Restore selection window opens. (image 9-45)
2. Click on Backup.
A message to indicate that backup can take some time appears. (image 9-46)
If no, Click No, cancel this action.
The software returns to the file manager screen.
4. Click Yes.

9. File Manager
A browser window on the file system of your PC opens. (image 9-47)

5. Browse to the location where you want to store the backup files and click OK.
A retrieve file message appears first for a few seconds followed by a message to indicate the number
of files and amount of data. (image 9-48, image 9-49)
6. Do you want to proceed with this backup action?
The software returns to the File manager window.
7. Click Yes.
The files will be transferred to the indicated directory. A status window indicates which file is transferred.
(image 9-50)
When finished, a ready status message will be displayed. (image 9-51)
Image 9-44
Backup/Restore selected Image 9-45
Backup/Restore choice window
Image 9-46
Backup message
Image 9-47
Browser on PC file system

9. File Manager
Image 9-48
Backup status, retrieve files Image 9-49
Backup amount indication

Retrieve status of backup Backup status ready
This mechanism backs up the complete file system, including Test patterns, configura-
tions, etc.
A partial back up can be made by downloading specific files with the File Manager.
It is recommended that for each installation the SCREEN files, PCF files and MACRO
files are copied to local PC as partial back up.
9.7 Restore the file system

What can be done?
The file system of the D-Cine Premiere can be restored from a original backup directory on the PC. Before
the restore will take place, certain checks will be performed to make sure that the backup files are valid.
It is preferable to use in the first place an Ethernet connection or in the second place a
direct RS232 connection to restore the file system.
CAUTION: Do not switch off the power !

Never give a reset command !
Never disconnect the Ethernet connection !
Never cancel the restore operation !
How to restore
1. Press Backup/Restore. (image 9-52)
The Backup/Restore selection window opens. (image 9-53)
2. Click on Restore.
A message to indicate that restore can take some time appears. (image 9-54)

9. File Manager
4. Click on Yes.
A browser window on your file system appears. (image 9-55)
5. Select an original backup directory and click on OK.
A message with the amount of files will be displayed.
When the selected directory is not an original directory, the restore fails. (image 9-56)
The files will be restored. A status message will be displayed during the restore. (image 9-57)
When finished, a ready message will be displayed followed by a restore successful message. Click OK
to terminate. (image 9-58, image 9-59)
7. Reset the projector head, in order to make the restored settings active.
Note: The projector can be reset remotely,see "Reset Projector Head", page 31
Image 9-52
Backup/Restore selected Image 9-53
Backup/Restore choice window
Image 9-54
Restore message
Image 9-55
Browser window on file system

9. File Manager
Image 9-57
Image 9-56 Restore message, busy
Restore message, amount of files
Image 9-58
Restore ready message
Image 9-59
Restore successful message

9. File Manager

10. Updates
10. UPDATES
CAUTION: Do not perform any other hardware updates while updating the software.
Never reset the power off the projector while performing software updates.
Never break the connection between your projector and your PC while performing soft-
ware updates.
see "Upgrade Troubleshooting", page 203 if such an event would occur.
Overview
• General overview
• General Updates
• Other individual upgrades
• Upgrade Troubleshooting
10.1 General overview

Updating
The D-Cine package contains only Barco updates. TI updates are done via a separate software package
(see "Updating TI boards", page 319).
The D-Cine Communicator enables the user to update Barco software and relevant settings to the D-Cine
Premiere module.
Way of updating for DP30 and DP50

There are three ways to update from a D-Cine package file:
• once a serial connection to RS232/RS422 and once a Serial connection to LoopIN/Out (Serial Bus
mode) to update the controller software.
• once a Ethernet connection and once a Serial connection to LoopIN/Out (Serial Bus mode) to update
the controller software. These method goes fast.
• the complete update via a Serial connection to Loop IN/Out but that can take 2 hours.
Way of updating for DP100-DP90

Updating should always be done via an Ethernet connection. Two connections are possible:
• Connect via the projector’s Barco IP address (preferred way).
• connect via the TI/Cinema IP address. This address must be within the same range as the Barco IP
address.
Upgrade recommendations
• When using Windows® XP with service pack 2, disable the internal firewall.
• For DP100-DP90, put the Barco IP address in the same range as the TI IP address (restore the IP
address after update to prevent problems with communication to other devices).

10. Updates
10.2 General Updates

D-Cine Software updates
All Barco update files are combined in one package file (zip file). This D-Cine software package file con-
tains software, configuration files and file for the file system of the projector.
CAUTION: Do not power down the projector while upgrading.

Do not break the connection between the PC and the projector.
How to update
Updating via an Ethernet connection :
1. Click on D-Cine Update Manager. (image 10-1)
The update manager opens. (image 10-2)
2. Click on Open Package File.
A Browser window opens.
3. Select the package file and click on Open. (image 10-3)
A version check of the hardware is executed at the same time. That means that the update software
version must be compatible with the actual installed hardware version. If there is a difference, a mes-
sage request to replace the hardware component will be displayed. (image 10-4)
After the hardware version check, the software scans the projector to look up the version and the time
stamp of the files actually loaded on the projector. It compares this information with the information in
the package file and builds up a table. The checked items are those which are recommended to be
updated, the background will be light yellow. (image 10-5)
For DP30 and DP50, when updating via the Ethernet connection, the Control Software will not be check
and the background will be dark yellow as this item can only be updated via a serial connection.
When clicking on a file, a short description will be shown in the Description pane.
4. Click on Update now. (image 10-6)
The updating will be started but first a message will be displayed. (image 10-7)
5. Click on Ok, start update now.
When the update is finished, a message will be displayed to indicate how many updates are successful.
(image 10-8)
6. After update, immediately reset the projector.
The connection will be lost.
Image 10-1
Starting the update procedure

10. Updates
Image 10-2
Update manager
Image 10-3
Selecting the update file

10. Updates
Image 10-4
Hardware version check

10. Updates
Image 10-5
Update list
Image 10-6
Update busy

10. Updates
Image 10-8
Image 10-7 Update message
Update caution
For DP30 and DP50, perform the same procedure via a Serial Connection Loop IN/Out
(Serial Bus Mode) to update the controller software if needed.
Ethernet will not work if default “default Gateway IP address” is not in the range of the
configured IP address.
When the ARM Main Application software is updated from 4.x to 5.x continue with the
procedure below.
Set default gateway after update via Ethernet connection

1. Make a serial connection.
2. Click on Projector Configuration tab.
3. Set within the Ethernet address pane the Default Gateway to the IP-Address of the router (MUST be
on the local subnet!)
Tip: If the router address is not known, set the Default Gateway IP Address the same IP address of
the projector.
If the address is not correct, a warning will be displayed.
4. Go back to the Updates tab and continue with the update of the Controller software. Follow the same
procedure as described above for a standard update.
Image 10-9
Message after reset
Update timings
A Major Update to D-Cine Premiere Package file 2.00 typically takes for DP30-DP50:
• Ethernet: 7.5 minutes + 2 minutes for controller update over Serial Connection to Loop In / Out
• Serial Connection to RS232/422: 18 minutes + 2 minutes for controller update over Serial Connection
to Loop In / Out
• Serial Connection to Loop In / Out: 120 minutes

10. Updates
For DP100-DP90:
• Updating will take about 30 minutes.
Updates from 2.00 to higher versions, will take significant less time.
10.3 Other individual upgrades

Overview
• Loading setting in the Button module
• Upgrading the Touch panel menu structure
• Controller Software update
10.3.1 Loading setting in the Button module
Button Module Settings

Button module settings contains info on which actions are coupled to each button/input. For
manual configuration, see Automation tab.
Only for DP30 and DP50.
How to load
1. Check the radio button in front of the Button Module Settings and click on Load. (image 10-10)
2. Select the settings file for the button module. Click on Open.
The new settings will be loaded in the button module.
Image 10-10
Button module upgrade
10.3.2 Upgrading the Touch panel menu structure

How to upgrade
1. Check the radio button in front of the Touch Panel Menu Structure and click Load. (image 10-11)
2. Select the touch panel menu structure file for the Touch Panel. Click on Open.

10. Updates
The new settings will be loaded in the Touch Panel.

Files to upload are typically called depending of the projector configuration. E.g. :
Menu M7 Chinese V2.0 bin Uses Chinese fonts for projector without an ACSAR
Menu M7 Chinese with ACSAR Uses Chinese fonts for projector with an ACSAR
V2.0 bin
Menu M7 English V2.0 bin Uses English fonts for projector without an ACSAR
Menu M7 English with ASCAR Uses English fonts for projector with an ACSAR
V2.0 bin
Image 10-11
Touch panel upgrade
If the connection to the projector was broken during this upload, you can restart the pro-
cedure. It is recommended to physically power OFF/ON the touch panel before retrying
a new Touch panel menus structure upload.
Typical update timings

Ethernet 14 to 16 minutes
Serial Connection to 22 to 24 minutes

RS232/422:22
Serial Connection to Loop In / 18 to 20 minutes

Out
10.3.3 Controller Software update
Only for DP30 and DP50.
Why a separate upload procedure.

The separate upload procedure can be seen as an emergency procedure. When something goes wrong
during the normal update procedure, e.g. power failure or connection failure, it is possible that the con-
troller software is damaged. The projector cannot start up anymore. Via this procedure it is possible to
reinstall the controller software and then run the complete upgrade.
How to re-install the controller software.

1. Make a serial connection between the PC and the projector.

10. Updates
2. Go to the Updates tab and select the radio button in front of Controller Software. Click on Load.
3. Browse to the directory where the D-Cine Communicator software is installed. Click on Updates and
select controller.bin.
The Controller software will be loaded again.
10.4 Upgrade Troubleshooting

Overview
• Connection broken, projector reset
• Connection broken while updating Button control or touch panel software.
10.4.1 Connection broken, projector reset
For DP30 and DP50
Problem
Connection has been broken while updating the controller software or the projector has been reset while
the controller software was being upgraded.
When connected over Ethernet, no temperatures, voltage levels, and main controller software can be read
out. Status LED 6 on the Barco Controller board is not blinking.
When connecting over Serial Connection to Loop IN/Out you get the following message:
Image 10-12
Controller software message
Solution
1. Press OK on popup window.
2. Go to the Updates tab.
3. Select Controler software.
4. Load the controller.bin file.
Note: The controller.bin file is always present in the D-Cine Software Package file. It can be extracted
from this zip file.

10. Updates
10.4.2 Connection broken while updating Button control or touch panel software.
Problem
The connection was broken while updating the button control software or the touch panel software. The
touch panel does not work as expected and or the button control does not work as expected.
Solution
1. Click on D-Cine Update Manager.
2. Click on Open Package File
3. Reopen the D-Cine Software package file with the D-Cine Update Manager (image 10-13)
The Touch Panel and/or button control software will be indicated as not available, because their main
application software might not be running.
4. Explicitly select the button Module software and Touch panel software on the check box.
5. Restart the update.
Note: Make sure the touch panel and/or button control are physically well connected.
Image 10-13
Update manager

11. Security Management
11. SECURITY MANAGEMENT

Overview
• Security management overview
• Starting up the Security management with valid key
• Adding an extra key to the list
• Changing the pin code of an existing key
• Get an overview of the Card Cage access
Security management is located within the Update tab of the software.
11.1 Security management overview

Overview
The physical access to the internal card cage of the projector is protected by a dallas iButton® and an
associated pin code. Each projector is delivered with its own physical Dallas key which is also entered in
the security management system.
For DP50 and DP30, to gain access to the card cage, place your dallas iButton® in the key slot and enter
the correct pin code on the keyboard next to the key slot.
For DP100 and DP90, to authorize after accessing the card cage and removing the light processor (en-
gine), place your dallas iButton® in the key slot and enter the correct pin code on the keyboard next to
the key slot.
Image 11-1
Card cage Dallas key protection
With the D-Cine Communicator software it is possible to add key/pin code combinations to the existing
ones. This can only be done when entering the original key with its corresponding pin code.
11.2 Starting up the Security management with valid key

How to start up
1. Click on Retrieve Key List. (image 11-2)
The Key Code window appears. (image 11-3)
2. Fill out the key code of the original dallas iButton® . (image 11-4)
Note: The given key combination is only as an example and is not valid for your projector.
3. Enter the corresponding pin code and click on Continue..

The key will first be validated. (image 11-5)

When the key is a valid one, the key list will be displayed. (image 11-6)
Image 11-3
Key code window
Image 11-2
Image 11-5
Key validation
Image 11-4
Key code window example

Image 11-6
Key list
A Key list when entered with original key

B Key list when entered with another valid key
11.3 Adding an extra key to the list

How to add
1. Start up first the Security management. see "Starting up the Security management with valid key", page
205.
2. Double click on to add a new key to the list.
The Key Code window opens.
3. Fill out the key code of the new dallas iButton® (image 11-4).
4. Enter a new pin code and press Continue.
The new key will be added to the key list (image 11-6).
5. Click on Save Key List to make the changes active.
11.4 Changing the pin code of an existing key

How to change
205.
2. Double click on an existing key. (image 11-7)
The key code window opens.
3. Enter a new pin code and press Continue.
The key list returns active.
4. Click on Save Key List to make the changes active.

Image 11-7
Key code list
11.5 Get an overview of the Card Cage access

How to get an overview
205.
2. Click on Read Log File. (image 11-8)
The Card Cage log file opens. (image 11-9)
This log file gives an overview of who accessed the card cage at which time.
Image 11-9
Card Cage log file
Image 11-8
Read log security file

12. Automation
12. AUTOMATION
Overview
• Introduction
• Creating an Action List
12.1 Introduction
Overview
Each D-Cine Premiere is delivered with one button module. Optionally, it is possible to buy up to 4 general
purpose input output boards (GPIO) for automation purposes of other processes related to the cinema
projection. E.g. opening the curtains, dimming the lights, etc.
Button 1 to 4 of the button module are completely configurable. The 4 lower buttons are always predefined
and cannot be configured. The upper two are for powering on/off the projection head and the lamp. The
lower two are for opening or closing the dowser (shutter).
Each GPIO board has up to 8 configurable inputs. The D-Cine Communicator detects automatically the
automation modules and shows the result in the automation interface.
Pressing on the automation interface one of the configurable buttons of the button module or a button
on an extra GPIO board, opens the configuration panel. Each input of the GPIOs can be configured to
execute an action list when going high and a different one when going low. Each button on the button
module can be configured to execute an action list when pressed or released.
Button panel with one extra automation module connected on position 2.
Image 12-1
Automation interface

12. Automation
12.2 Creating an Action List

What is an Action List?
An action list is an list of actions that can be executed when a certain input becomes high or low (button
pressed or released).
The following actions can take place:
• Put a certain output of a module (this module or another module) to high or low.
• Execute a Macro File
• Switch the lamp on or off
• Open or close the dowser/shutter
An action list can contain maximum 8 actions.
How to create
1. Push first on a button in the automation interface for which input you want to create an action list.
The Configuration Panel opens. (image 12-2)
2. Click on a radio button in the action pane to create an action.
The following items can be selected:
- Output: see selecting an output.
- Macro
- Lamp: lamp on or off
- Dowser: open dowser of close dowser
3. Click on <== to add the action to the action list for ’input goes high’ or ’input goes low’.
4. Repeat step 2 to add other actions (maximum 8 actions are allowed).
5. Click on Proceed to save the current action list.
Image 12-2
Configuration panel action list
Selecting an output
1. Click on the module selection drop down menu.

12. Automation
The drop down menu opens. (image 12-3)

2. Select a module.
3. Click on the output drop down list.
The output drop down list will be adapted according the module selection. (image 12-4)
4. Select an output.
5. Click on the status list for the selected output. (image 12-5)
The choices are:
- off
- on
- pulse
Image 12-3
Output module selection
Image 12-4
Output selection
Image 12-5
Status selection output
Selecting a macro
1. When macro is selected, a list of macro files will be displayed.
Select a macro out of the list. (image 12-6)
Some macro file will be grayed out when the name of the file is not conform. In this automation system
only macro files in the form of MACROxx can be coupled with the system. Macro files with another
name can also be used as they can be renamed to the standard macro name format. To rename a file,
see "Renaming files and folders", page 177.
MACROxx as name is MACRO followed with 2 digits (between 01 and 99).
Image 12-6
Macro selection for action list
When changing the commands associated with a button of the button control, it is nec-
essary to reset the touch panel (if any available) after pressing the proceed button. See
installation manual of the projector.

12. Automation

13. Automation for DP100 and DP90
13. AUTOMATION FOR DP100 AND DP90

Overview
• Introduction
• Activating a macro
• Macro association
• Edit a macro
13.1 Introduction
Overview
The user interface has a button configuration page with 14 preset buttons which are the same as those
on the button panel of the projector. Next to this page, there are also 5 virtual pages with each 14 preset
buttons. These preset buttons are also accessible via the touch panel.
To each button (from the real page or from one of the virtual pages), a macro can be associated. The
associated macro can also be edited via the Macro Editor by selecting the Edit macro button.
Image 13-1
Button configuration

Default associations for the real page

Button4 Macro name
1 292A_P7_Flat_1280
2 292A_P7_Scope_1280
3 292A_P7_Flat_1920
4 292A_P7_Scope_1920
5 292A_P7_Flat_2048
6 292A_P7_Scope_2048
7 292A_P3_Flat_1280
8 292A_P3_Scope_1280
9 292A_P3_Flat_1920
10 292A_P3_Scope_1920
11 ACSAR_Input1
12 ACSAR_Input2
13 ACSAR_Input3
14 ACSAR_Input4
13.2 Activating a macro

How to activate
1. Click on the button next to the desired macro description.
The selected macro will be executed. As an indication that the macro is activated, a green led will be
displayed in the corner of the button. (image 13-2)
Image 13-2
Active button
13.3 Macro association

How to associate
1. Move you mouse over a button.
Next to the button, two selection buttons appear. (image 13-3)
2. Click on Change macro.
The Macro selection window opens. (image 13-4)
3. Select a macro out of the list and click on Select.
4. Buttons are numbered from left to right and from top to bottom

The selected macro will be associated with button and the name of the macro will be filled out next to
the button.
Image 13-3
Change macro selected
Image 13-4
Macro selection window
13.4 Edit a macro

How to edit
1. Mouse you mouse over a button.
Next to the button, two selection buttons appear. (image 13-5)
2. Click on Edit macro.

The Macro editor starts up. (image 13-6)

For the explanation about the Macro editor, see "Macro Editor", page 265.
Image 13-5
Edit selected macro

Image 13-6
Macro editor


14. Server
14. SERVER
Overview
• Introduction
• Server overview interface
• Time Control
• Subtitle Control
• Metadata Control
14.1 Introduction
Overview
The D-Cine Premiere projectors are equipped with the possibility to process Subtitle and metadata infor-
mation coming from a server.
Principal diagram :
Satelitte
Theatre side
Satelitte dish
Server DLP Cinema
Projector
SMPTE292
Image Image
Image + Im a g Image Data
files Processing
e
Fil e s Subtitle Projection
Audio Data Playback
n g
i t le
Or Overlay
server Ethernet Ov e r la y
Subtitle Subtitle
Sub t it le Subtile Data
+
files Processing
F ile s
Timing g
Subtitle Files
Multiple Subtitle
Languages Selection
Operator
Control
Image 14-1
Principal diagram subtitling
The following process happens :

Image information together with audio data enters the server. Next to it, separate subtitle files in multiple
languages are stored on the same server as well as metadata files.
The operator of the Cinema theatre selects the film and the additional subtitling on the server.
The image data will be sent over the SMPTE292 line to the projector. When the subtitling mechanism is
activated inside the projector, this projector will process subtitle data and timings which are sent over a
Ethernet network to the projector. The projector will render the subtitling in overlay to the image.

14. Server
14.2 Server overview interface

Overview of the layout
Image 14-2
Overview interface
In order to simulate a server triggering the projector’s subtitling mechanism, or to check if a server is
configured as it should be, Barco provides an interface as shown above.
The following is visualized from left to right and from top to bottom :
• time code, internal or external
• time code itself
• Status, running or not running
• Subtitle status, enables or disabled
• Subtitle file location
• Subtitle ’time to live’ (TTL)
• Metadata status, enabled or disabled
• Metadata file location
• Metadata ’time to live’ (TTL)
14.3 Time Control

Overview
• Time source
• Input frequency
• Timeline stamp
• Timeline adjustment
• Control
14.3.1 Time source

Why used
The selected time source will be used to synchronize the subtitling and metadata information with the
image stream.
How to select
1. Click on one of the radio buttons in the Time source field. (image 14-3)
292 External The projector will take the time code that is inserted in the SMPTE292 stream for
subtitle synchronization
Internal The projector will take the time code from its internal time code generator.

14. Server
Image 14-3
Time source selection
When 292 External is selected, the Timeline stamp and Timeline adjustment are grayed
out.
14.3.2 Input frequency

Why necessary
The projector needs to know the frequency of the input signal presented to the projector so that it can
calculate internal synchronization parameters.
How to select
1. Click on one of the radio buttons in the Input frequency field. (image 14-4)
Possible choices :
- 23.98 Hz
- 24.00 Hz
Image 14-4
Input frequency selection
14.3.3 Timeline stamp
Only available for an internal time source.
What is the purpose

The internal time code will be set to the value of the timeline stamp. The image displayed will be the image
with eventually the subtitling overlay at the time of the timeline stamp. When the play button is pressed,
the time code starts running from the value in the timeline stamp.
How to enter a timeline stamp

1. Click on the hours, minutes or seconds value and enter the new value with the digit keys on your key-
board
Or,
click on the hours, minutes or seconds value and click then on the up or down arrows to change the
value to the desired one. (image 14-5)
2. Click on Apply time now to apply the new time to the time code.

14. Server
Image 14-5
Set up timeline stamp
14.3.4 Timeline adjustment
What is the purpose

While the time code is running, the timeline can be adjusted by adding time to current time or by subtract-
ing time from the current time. With these small corrections, it is possible to adjust small misalignments
between the spoken text and the subtitling.
How to add a correction

1. Click into the minutes, seconds or milliseconds field and select the actual value. Change that value by
entering the new value with the digit keys on your keyboard
Or,
click on the up or down arrows next to the minutes, seconds or milliseconds input field to change the
value to the desired one. (image 14-6)
40 milliseconds corresponds with 1 frame for an input frequency of 24 Hz.
2. Click on + or - button to activate the correction.
+ Entered correction will be added to the current time

- Entered correction will be subtracted from the current time
Image 14-6
Timeline adjustment
14.3.5 Control
How to control
1. Click on the Start button ( )to start the internal time code.
2. Click on Stop button ( ) to stop the internal time code.

14. Server
14.4 Subtitle Control

Overview
• Steps to be taken for subtitle control
• Subtitle server
• Subtitle file
• Time to live (TTL)
• Subtitle Control activation
When the projector is reset or power-cycled, the subtitling function will be disabled.
14.4.1 Steps to be taken for subtitle control

Overview
1. With Subtitle enable not checked, fill out first the subtitle server address.
2. Set up the subtitle file.
3. Set up the “time to live”.
4. Activate the subtitling
14.4.2 Subtitle server

How to set up
1. Click in the subtitle server input field.
2. Fill out a valid IP address or host name (only when a DNS server is used) (image 14-7)
Image 14-7
Subtitle server address
14.4.3 Subtitle file

How to select
1. Click on the Select button next to the server address. (image 14-8)
A DCine Subtitle browser will open. (image 14-9)
2. Click on file to select that file.
The content of the file will be displayed. (image 14-10)
3. Is this the correct file?

14. Server
If yes, Click on OK.

The complete URL will be written in the Selected Subtitle XML file field.
If no, click on Cancel and select another file.
Image 14-8
Subtitle file selection start up
Image 14-9
Example of subtitle browser

14. Server
Image 14-10
Subtitle file : example
14.4.4 Time to live (TTL)

Why used
The TTL (Time to live) is a countdown time-out used to prevent subtitles from being left on the screen
through loss of communication.
The server or D-Cine Communicator will continuously ask for the subtitle status. As long as the ’time to
live’ counter has not been expired and the subtitle status command is executed, this TTL value will be
resetted to its original value set in the TTL interface.
If the TTL value reaches ’0’, the system will disable the subtitle function and the subtitling will be removed
from the screen.
How to set up
1. Click into the TTL input field and select the actual value. Change that value by entering the new value
with the digit keys on your keyboard (the value must be in seconds)
Or,
click on the up or down arrows next to the TTL input field to change the value to the desired one.
(image 14-11)
Image 14-11
Time to live setting subtitling

14. Server
14.4.5 Subtitle Control activation

How to activate
1. Check the check box in front of Subtitle enabled. (image 14-12)
Note: This is only possible when a server address and a subtitle file are filled out.
Image 14-12
Activating Subtitling
14.5 Metadata Control

Metadata
Generally referred to as "data about data" or "data describing other data". More specifically,
information that is considered ancillary to or otherwise directly complementary to the essence.
Any information that a content provider considers useful or of value when associated with the
essence being provided.
Overview
• Introduction
• Steps to be taken for metadata control
• Metadata server
• Metadata file
• Time to live (TTL)
• Metadata Control activation
14.5.1 Introduction
Overview
In case of a digital Cinema projector, Metadata contains all the data the projector needs, to be able to
display a certain content as it should be. Typically the Metadata is the data that we find in PCF files.
Metadata mode means that the server has control over the projector’s active PCF Data. Accessing the
Active PCF data of a projector in Metadata mode from the D-Cine Communicator or touch panel will fail.
Metadata Control needs to be disabled first.
Content of the metadata info

Metadata Control from a server:
• Provides projector setup instructions without operator action
• Contains instructions provided by content creator (PostProduction)
• Information sent from server to projector at start of the movie
• Setup parameters include:
- Target color space (7-point) (TCGD)
- Color space conversion parameters (CSC)
- Gamma (LUT-DG)
- Incoming image size (SOURCE)
- Projector Lookup tables (LUT-AL, LUT-CLUT)

14. Server
14.5.2 Steps to be taken for metadata control

Overview
1. With Metadata enable not checked, fill out first the metadata server address.
2. Set up the metadata file.
3. Set up the “time to live”.
4. Activate the metadata
14.5.3 Metadata server

How to set up
1. Click in the metadata server input field.
2. Fill out a valid IP address or host name (only when a DNS server is used) (image 14-13)
Image 14-13
Metadata server address
14.5.4 Metadata file

How to select
1. Click on the Select button next to the server address. (image 14-14)
A DCine browser will open. (image 14-15)
2. Click on file to select that file.
The content of the file will be displayed. (image 14-16)
3. Is this the correct file?
If yes, Click on OK.
The complete URL will be written in the Selected Metadata XML file field.
If no, click on Cancel and select another file.
Image 14-14
Metadata file selection

14. Server
Image 14-15
Example of browser window
Image 14-16
Example of metadata file

14. Server
14.5.5 Time to live (TTL)

Why used
The TTL (Time to live) is a countdown time-out used to prevent the use of metadata information through
loss of communication.
The server or D-Cine Communicator will continuously ask for the metadata status. As long as the ’time to
live’ counter has not been expired and the metadata status command is executed, this TTL value will be
resetted to its original value set in the TTL interface.
If the TTL value reaches ’0’, the system will enable the metadata function.
How to set up
1. Click into the TTL input field and select the actual value. Change that value by entering the new value
with the digit keys on your keyboard (the value must be in seconds)
Or,
click on the up or down arrows next to the TTL input field to change the value to the desired one.
(image 14-17)
Image 14-17
Time to live
14.5.6 Metadata Control activation

How to activate
1. Check the check box in front of Metadata enabled.
Note: This is only possible when a server address and a metadata file are filled out.
Note: An indication in the Setup Control interface will be added.
CAUTION: When metadata control is enabled, the following functions are not possible :
execution of macros, applying a PCF file (e.g. on Setup page, when connecting), chang-
ing the Active Area and using the PCF editor.

14. Server

15. Projector Status for DP50
15. PROJECTOR STATUS FOR DP50

Overview
• Status overviews
• Projector Log Information
• Security log file
• Certificates

Summary
This interface gives feedback on any item that can be read out in the D-Cine Premiere.
Image 15-1
Projector status
Check first the Module Status. If the status is indicated in black is everything OK. If some items are indi-
cated in red, follow the description in the next items to find out what is wrong with your projector.
To be sure the projector is ready as Secured platform, check the Interface Board Type. When the board
is a type 3 board, then the projector can operate as a secured platform.
If the card cage inside the projector is open, an error message will be displayed: Tamper-Switch Activated.

15.2 Status overviews

Overview
• Switch Mode Power Supply status
• Fan/Tec Controller status
• Boards Status
• External Cooler Unit Status
• CLO status
• Security Card Cage Status
• Barco access level
15.2.1 Switch Mode Power Supply status

Status overview
If the Switch Mode Power Supply status is failed, one of the following items must have a red indication:
• SMPT voltages: these voltages can out of range
• Analog Channels
• Digital Channels
• Fan speed, SMPS
• Projector Temperatures
- Cooler SMPS 1
- Cooler SMPS 2
- Ambient Output
• Bottom inlet Filter
Image 15-2
Projector status SMPS overview

15.2.2 Fan/Tec Controller status

Status overview
If the Fan/Tec Controller status is failed, one of the following items must have a red indication:
• Fan Speeds (all, except SMPS)
• Tec Voltages
• DMD temperatures (red, green, blue)
• Ambient Input
Image 15-3
Projector Status Fan/tec overview
WARNING: Servicing only allowed by a Barco authorized service technician.

Fan locations
Image 15-5
Fan Card cage inside
1 Fan card cage inside
Image 15-4
Fan location
1 IR filter
2 Engine
3 Integrator
4 SMPS
5 Power Factor
Image 15-6
Fan Card cage cover
1 Fan card cage back side cover
Image 15-7
Fan Engine
1 Engine sealing

15.2.3 Boards Status

Status overview
If the Boards Status is failed, check the boards status pane. If one of them is in failed status, information
of the status is given in the log table of the same pane.
Image 15-8
Projector Status Boards Status
15.2.4 External Cooler Unit Status

Status overview
The following statuses are possible:
• Not Active: Cooler unit not powered
• Check fluid:
• Check flow: no circulation of liquid in the cooler system
• OK
15.2.5 CLO status

Status overview
CLO status can be OK or failed. When failed, there is a communication error between the CLO device
and the projector controller.
15.2.6 Security Card Cage Status

Status overview
Security card cage status can be OK or failed. When failed, there is a communication error between the
Security card cage and the controller.

15.2.7 Barco access level

Status overview
Value should be 0x04.
When not correct, communication between TI input boards and Barco controller will not work.
When this value is higher, click on the Barco Access Level item. The access level will change to the correct
value (This must be done when a spare TI board was inserted into the projector).
15.3 Projector Log Information

Overview
• Displaying Projector Log Information
• Saving the Projector Log File
• Refreshing the Projector log information
• Clearing the Projector log file
• Active Cooling on DMD’s
15.3.1 Displaying Projector Log Information

How to display
1. Click on Projector Log File. (image 15-9)
The Projector log file will be retrieved. A reading window will indicate the status. (image 15-10)
When ready, the projector log information will be displayed.
The projector log file contains the following information:
- actions done on the projector
- status indication when projector is in the fail state. (image 15-11)
Image 15-10
Reading the projector log file
Image 15-9
Projector log file selected
Image 15-11
Projector Log information

15.3.2 Saving the Projector Log File

How to save
1. Click on Save. (image 15-12)
Image 15-12
Save the projector log file
15.3.3 Refreshing the Projector log information

How to refresh
1. Click on Refresh. (image 15-13)
The Projector log file will be loaded again. A reading window will indicate the status. (image 15-14)
When ready, the projector log window will be updated.
Image 15-14
Image 15-13
Refresh the projector log file
15.3.4 Clearing the Projector log file

How to clear
1. Click on Clear. (image 15-15)
The projector log will be cleared.
Image 15-15
Clear projector log file
15.3.5 Active Cooling on DMD’s

Status overview
The following states are possible:
• idle : no cooling active
• cooling : cooling active

15.4 Security log file

Get log file
To get an online security logging, click on Security Log. The software will retrieve the security log informa-
tion from the projector. When somebody tries to break-in in the projector electronics by opening the card
cage, this action will be logged in the security logging. This security log file cannot be deleted.
Image 15-16
Security log selected
Image 15-17
In normal circumstances, this security log file must be empty.
Save to PC
The online security log file can be saved to PC just by clicking Save to file on PC. A save window opens.
Select a location and enter a file name for the logging. Click on Save.
15.5 Certificates
About certificates
Before some productions are authorized to be displayed with a certain projector, the film distributor must
distribute a key to the theatre owners. This key is associated with the projector certificate which will be
available for the film distributors on a web portal.
The certificate file must be uploaded on that web portal during the installation of the projector or after
servicing the Interface board.

To get the certificate file
Image 15-18
Certificate selection
To get online a certificate file, click Certificate. A browse window opens. Browse to the desired location,
enter a file name and click on Save. The file will be saved as an .xml file.
To upload the file on the web portal, follow the procedure in the installation manual.


16. PROJECTOR STATUS FOR DP30

Overview
• Projector Log Information
• Certificates

Summary
Image 16-1
Projector Status
Check first the Module Status. If the status is indicated in black is everything OK. If some items are indi-


Overview
• Switch Mode Power Supply status
• Lamp Power Supply status
• DCDC Controller
• Board status
• CLO status
• Security Card Cage Status
• Lens Motor Controller
• Lens Info Module
• Barco access level
16.2.1 Switch Mode Power Supply status

Status overview
If the Switch Mode Power Supply status is failed, one of the following items must have a red indication:
• SMPS voltages
• Fan speed
• Analog Channels
• Digital Channels
• Projector Temperatures
- Cooler SMPS1
- Cooler SMPS2
- Ambient Output
Image 16-2
Projector status SMPS overview

16.2.2 Lamp Power Supply status

Status overview
If the Lamp Power Supply status is failed, one of the following items must have a red indication:
• SMPS voltages
• Fan speed
• Lamp house temperature
Image 16-3
Projector status Lamp power supply overview
16.2.3 DCDC Controller

Status overview
If the DCDC controller is failed. Error messages will be given in the error message pane.

Image 16-4
Projector Status DCDC convertor Status
16.2.4 Board status

Status overview
If the Boards Status is failed, check the boards status pane. If one of them is in failed status, information
of the status is given in the log table of the same pane.

Image 16-5
Projector Status Boards Status
16.2.5 CLO status

Status overview
CLO status can be OK or failed. When failed, there is a communication error between the CLO device
and the projector controller.
16.2.6 Security Card Cage Status

Status overview
Security card cage status can be OK or failed. When failed, there is a communication error between the
Security card cage and the controller.
16.2.7 Lens Motor Controller

Status overview
If the Lens Motor Controller Status is failed, check the ambient temperature and read the error messages.

Image 16-6
Projector Status Lens Motor Controller Status
16.2.8 Lens Info Module

Status overview
The lens info module status can be OK or failed.
16.2.9 Barco access level

Status overview
Value should be 0x04.
When not correct, communication between TI input boards and Barco controller will not work.
When this value is higher, click on the Barco Access Level item. The access level will change to the correct
value (This must be done when a spare TI board was inserted into the projector).
16.3 Projector Log Information

Overview
• Displaying Projector Log Information
• Saving the Projector Log File
• Refreshing the Projector log information
• Clearing the Projector log file

16.3.1 Displaying Projector Log Information

How to display
1. Click on Projector Log File. (image 16-7)
The Projector log file will be retrieved. A reading window will indicate the status. (image 16-8)
When ready, the projector log information will be displayed.
The projector log file contains the following information:
- actions done on the projector
- status indication when projector is in the fail state. (image 16-9)
Image 16-8
Reading the projector log file
Image 16-7
Projector log file selected
Image 16-9
Projector Log information
16.3.2 Saving the Projector Log File

How to save
1. Click on Save. (image 16-10)
Image 16-10
Save the projector log file
16.3.3 Refreshing the Projector log information

How to refresh
1. Click on Refresh. (image 16-11)
The Projector log file will be loaded again. A reading window will indicate the status. (image 16-12)
When ready, the projector log window will be updated.

Image 16-12
Image 16-11
Refresh the projector log file
16.3.4 Clearing the Projector log file

How to clear
1. Click on Clear. (image 16-13)
The projector log will be cleared.
Image 16-13
Clear projector log file
16.4 Security log file

Get log file

Image 16-14
Security log selected
Image 16-15
Save to PC
16.5 Certificates
About certificates

Image 16-16
Certificate selection

17. Projector Status for DP100-DP90
17. PROJECTOR STATUS FOR

DP100-DP90
Overview
• General Overview
• Certificates
17.1 General Overview

Summary
Image 17-1
Projector status
Check first the Board Status. If the status is indicated in black, everything is OK. If some items are indi-
To get an overview of the active files, click on File Active. An overview window will be displayed. For
more information, see chapter "9. File Manager", "Read Files Active", page 186.


Overview
• Voltage statuses
• Temperature statuses
• Fan statuses
• Other projector properties
• Projector Log file
17.2.1 Voltage statuses

Status overview
When one of the voltages are out of specification, the voltage indication will be red.
Image 17-2
Status overview voltages
To see the minimum and maximum allowed value for each item, just click on the + before that item.
17.2.2 Temperature statuses

Status overview
When one of the temperatures are out of specification, the indication will be in red.

Image 17-3
Status overview temperatures
Sensor locations

Ambient temperature sensor Sensors on modules
A Sensor on PFC
B Sensor on heatsink SMPS

Image 17-6
Lamp house sensor
17.2.3 Fan statuses

Status overview
If one of the fans fail, the corresponding indication will be displayed in red.
Image 17-7
Status overview fans

Fan locations
Image 17-8
Cold mirror bottom fan Image 17-9
Cold mirror top fan

Fan 1 – 4 elcabox Lamp fan cathode

Lamp fan anode Start pulse generator fan

17.2.4 Other projector properties

Overview
Image 17-14
Miscellaneous items
• Lamp run time : expressed in hours. Time lamp is running since first start up.
• Lamp strikes : number of strikes since first start up of the lamp.
• Barco access level : value should be 0x04. When not correct, communication between TI input boards
and Barco controller will not work. When this value is higher, click on the Barco Access Level item.
The access level will change to the correct value (This must be done when a spare TI board was
inserted into the projector).
• Active cooling Red (active - not active) : when active, Peltier cooling is activated for Red DMD.
• Active cooling Green (active - not active) : when active, Peltier cooling is activated for Green DMD.
• Active cooling Blue (active - not active) : when active, peltier cooling is activated for Blue DMD.
• Waterflow: checks if waterflow is possible. See also location waterflow switch (image 17-15).
• Outlet air flow : checks if there is air coming out of the outlet.
Image 17-15
Waterflow switch location

17.2.5 Projector Log file

Get log file
To get an online logging, click on Projector Log. The software will retrieve the log information from the
projector. This can take several minutes as the log file can be very large.
Image 17-16
Projector log selection

Image 17-17
Projector log
Save to PC
The online log file can be saved to PC just by clicking Save to PC. A save window opens. Select a location
and enter a file name for the logging. Click on Save.
17.2.6 Security log file

Get log file

Image 17-18
Security log selection

Image 17-19
Security log
Save to PC
17.3 Certificates
About certificates

Image 17-20
Get certificate file


18. Version Info
18. VERSION INFO

Overview
• Version Information
18.1 Version Information

Overview
The Version Information pane gives an overview of the firmware versions used in the boards.
The following boards are listed:
• E2 Formatter Board
• Interface Board
• Modules/Devices
• Processor Board
• SMPS & Fan Ctrl settings
• Touch Panel menu structure
• Touch Panel Software
Image 18-1
Version information

18. Version Info

19. Macro Editor
19. MACRO EDITOR

Overview
• Create a new Macro
• Save a Macro
• Edit a Macro file
• Edit the attributes (values) of the items
19.1 Create a new Macro

How to create
1. Click on Create new macro. (image 19-1)
2. Click Yes to create a new macro.
The current settings will not be saved.
A new macro file will be created. The macro editor will be displayed without any command filled out.
3. Insert the desired commands.
4. Enter a new name for the macro.
5. Click on Save/Exit to save your new created macro.
The macro will be added to the list of macro files.
Image 19-2
Create new macro message
Image 19-1
Create new macro
19.2 Save a Macro

Save macro with same name
1. When a macro has already a name, just click on Save/Exit. (image 19-3)
The macro will be saved and the macro editor will be closed.

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-3
Save macro
Save macro on a different name

1. Click in the Macro name input field. (image 19-3)
2. Delete the actual indicate name and enter a new name with your keyboard.
3. Click on Save/Exit.
The macro will be saved with the new name and the macro editor will be closed.
19.3 Edit a Macro file

19.3.1 Selecting a Macro file
How to select
1. Right click on a file in the macro file list (this list is visible after clicking Change in Projector Configuration
section Opto isolated GPI or after starting the configuration panel of the Automation tab or in the Internal
File system list, Macro view in File Manager) and select Edit Macro file or for DP100/DP90 click on
Edit Macro in the Automation tab after moving your mouse over a button. (image 19-4)
The macro editor window starts up with the selected macro in edit mode. (image 19-5)
Image 19-4
Edit a macro

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-5
Macro editor window
19.3.2 Delete a command out of a macro file

How to delete
1. Select the item that has to be deleted and push delete on your keyboard.
Or,
right click on that item.
A delete pop up menu appears. Select delete. (image 19-6)
Image 19-6
Delete item
19.3.3 Add commands to a macro file

How to add
1. To insert an item, click first the a command set tab to which that item belongs.

19. Macro Editor
The following commands tabs are available:

- Input control
- Preset files
- Test pattern
- Output
- Automation
- Error handling (image 19-7)
The selected tab opens and the commands become available.
2. Select a command and click Insert –>. (image 19-8)
The inserted command will be added as last one in the list. (image 19-9)

Available commands Inserting a command
Image 19-9
Insertion result
19.3.4 Change the order of the Macro commands

How to change
1. Click on an item and hold down the mouse button. (image 19-10)

19. Macro Editor
2. Move your mouse up or down until the desired position is reached for the selected item.
Image 19-10
Change macro file list
19.4 Edit the attributes (values) of the items

Overview
• Input Control
• Preset files
• Test pattern
• Output
• ACSAR2
• Automation
• Error handling
19.4.1 Input Control
19.4.1.1 Select input

What will be done?
This command sets the active input to a certain port.
How to select
1. Click on Select input.
The right pane shows an overview of the possible inputs. (image 19-11)
This overview is different for DP30 – DP50 and DP100 – DP90.
2. Click on the radio button in front of the port you want to select.

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-11
Select input command
19.4.1.2 Select input path (only for DP100-DP90)

What will be done?
This command sets the DVI-A path for Cine input (projector DVI-A input) or for the output of the ACSAR2.
How to select
1. Click on Select input.
The right pane shows an overview of the possible inputs. (image 19-12)
2. Click on the radio button in front of the path you want to select.
Cine input path External DVI is routed to the projector
ACSAR input ACSAR inputs are routed to the projector

port
Image 19-12
Select input path command

19. Macro Editor
19.4.1.3 Processing path

What can be done?
The processing path for the incoming signals can be set to standard processing or cinema processing.
When set to automatic, the projector itself detects the correct path.
How to select
1. Click on Processing path.
The right pane shows an overview of the possible paths. (image 19-13)
2. Click on the drop down box.
The possible choices become available.
3. Click on the desired processing path.
Standard Standard processing has no scaling, no resizing, and no anamorphic lens

processing factor.
Cinema Cinema processing contains the following functionality : image scaling,

processing 3:2 pull down functionality, SMPTE291 embedded data, LUT’s for analog,
de-gamma and color correction. However, contrast and brightness settings
are only applicable for standard processing (non-cinema processing).
Automatic The projector makes the choice itself depending on the input frequency.
For a Vertical Rate between 23 and 61 Hz it will select the Cinema processing
path.
For a Vertical Rate higher than 61 Hz it will select the Standard processing
path.
Image 19-13
Processing path command
19.4.1.4 SMPTE292 packing

What can done ?
The source format can be selected for SMPTE292 A and SMPTE292 B.
How to select
1. Click on SMPTE292 A Packing or SMPTE292 B packing.

19. Macro Editor
The right pane shows an overview of the possible packings (source formats). (image 19-14)
3. Click on the desired packing
The following packings are supported:
- Standard 4:2:2
- Non-Standard 4:2:2 12 bits/color
Image 19-14
SMPTE292 packing command
19.4.1.5 SMPTE 292 dual packing

What can done ?
The source format can be selected for SMPTE292 dual.
For the moment, only a default format is available.
How to select
1. Click on SMPTE292 Dual Packing.

19. Macro Editor
The right pane shows an overview of the possible packings (source formats). (image 19-15)
Only the following format is supported:
- Default :4:4:2 Packed 10 bits/color
Image 19-15
SMPTE292 dual packing command
19.4.1.6 DVI packing

What can done ?
The source format can be selected for DVI A (all projectors) and DVI B (only DP100-DP90).
How to select
1. Click on DVI A Packing or on DVI B Packing. (image 19-16)
The right pane shows an overview of the possible packages (source formats).
3. Select the desired format.
The following format are supported:
- Standard 8 bits/color
- 10 bits/color, packed
- 12 bits/color, packed

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-16
DVI A packing command
19.4.1.7 DVI Dual packing

What can done ?
The source format can be selected for DVI dual (only DP100-DP90).
How to select
1. Click on DVI Dual. (image 19-17)
The right pane shows an overview of the possible packages (source formats).
3. Select the desired format.
The following format are supported:
- 10 bits/color Dual
- 10 bits/color, Twin
Image 19-17
DVI A packing command

19. Macro Editor
19.4.2 Preset files
19.4.2.1 Activate PCF file

What can be done ?
The active PCF file can be installed in the projector via the Activate PCF file command.
How to select a file

1. Click on Activate PCF file. (image 19-18)
The right pane shows the actual selected file.
2. Click on Select files.
A files overview window will be displayed. (image 19-19)
3. Select the desired file out of the list and click Select.
Or,
double click on the desired file.
The selected file name appears next to Filename.
Image 19-18
Activate File command
Image 19-19
Active file selection

19. Macro Editor
It is also possible to click in the Filename input field and enter an existing file name with
the keyboard.
19.4.2.2 Activate SCREEN file

What can be done ?
The active SCREEN file (contains information about the screen configuration) can be installed in the pro-
jector via the Activate SCREEN file command.

1. Click on Activate SCREEN file. (image 19-20)
Or,
Image 19-20
Activate SCREEN File command

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-21
Active SCREEN file selection list
the keyboard.
19.4.2.3 Activate EXTRA file

What can be done ?
The active EXTRA file (can contains information about the source settings, 3D settings, etc., information
not included in other files) can be installed in the projector via the Activate EXTRA file command.

1. Click on Activate EXTRA file. (image 19-22)
Or,

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-22
Activate EXTRA File command
Image 19-23
Active EXTRA file selection list
the keyboard.

19. Macro Editor
19.4.2.4 Activate MCGD file

What can be done ?
The active MCGD file (contains color calibration information) can be installed in the projector via the Acti-
vate MCGD file command.

1. Click on Activate MCGD file.
The right pane shows the actual selected file. (image 19-24)
Or,
Image 19-24
Activate MCGD file command

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-25
Activate MCGD file selection list
the keyboard.
19.4.2.5 Activate ACSAR 2 layout file

What can be done
When an ACSAR 2 is connected and the ACSAR 2 path is selected, the window (inputs) layout can be
loaded via a macro.
How to load a layout file

1. Click on Active ACSAR 2 layout file
The right pane shows the actual selected layout file. (image 19-26)
2. To change the actual file, click on Select file.
The Open a layout file window opens. (image 19-27)
3. Select a file out of the list and click OK.
The selected file comes in the Layout Filename field.

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-26
Activate ACSAR 2 layout file
Image 19-27
Select layout file
19.4.2.6 Activate ACSAR 2 Input file

How to activate
1. Click on Activate A2 Input file.
The right pane shows the actual selected input and selected input file for this input. (image 19-28)
2. Select an input.
3. Click on Select file.
The file list opens. (image 19-29)
4. Select a file and click OK.
The name of the file will be filled out next to Input FileName.

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-28
Load input file
Image 19-29
Input file selection
19.4.2.7 Auto load ACSAR2 input file

How to enable
1. Click on Auto load input.
The right pane shows the actual setting. (image 19-30)
2. Click on the desired radio button to switch between automatic file load on or off.

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-30
Auto load file
19.4.3 Test pattern
19.4.3.1 Enable test pattern

What can be done ?
A test pattern which is stored in a file can be enabled.
How to select a test pattern

1. Click on Enable test pattern. (image 19-31)
The right pane shows the actual selected test pattern file.
2. Click on Select testpattern.
The test pattern selection window opens. (image 19-32)
3. Select a file and click Select.
The selected file will be filled out in the Testpattern Filename field.
Image 19-31
Enable test pattern selection

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-32
Test pattern file selection
19.4.3.2 Disable test pattern

To disable
Insert the command in the macro list. All actual test patterns will be disabled.
Image 19-33
Disable test pattern
19.4.4 Output
19.4.4.1 Lamp control

What can be done ?
The lamp can be switched on or off via this macro command.
How to switch the lamp

1. Click on Lamp control. (image 19-34)
The right pane shows the selection buttons.
2. Select the radio button of your choice.

19. Macro Editor
lamp on lamp will be switched on
lamp off lamp will be switched off
Image 19-34
Lamp control command
19.4.4.2 Dowser control

What can be done ?
The dowser can be closed or opened via this macro command.
How to switch the dowser

1. Click on Lamp control. (image 19-35)
The right pane shows the selection buttons.
2. Select the radio button of your choice.
Open dowser dowser will be opened
Close dowser dowser will be closed
Image 19-35
Dowser control command

19. Macro Editor
19.4.4.3 Set the execution delay for a ’blank image’

What can be done ?
The image can be electronically be blanked after a certain delay time.
How to set
1. Click on Blank Image Output. (image 19-36)
The right pane shows the execution delay input field. The value is expressed in milliseconds.
2. Click on the up or down arrows to change the value. The value change in steps of 10.
Or,
click in the input field and enter the desired value with the keyboard.
Image 19-36
Black image output command
19.4.4.4 Set the execution delay for a ’deblank image output’

How to set
1. Click on Deblank Image Output. (image 19-37)
The right pane shows the execution delay input field. The value is expressed in milliseconds.
2. Click on the up or down arrows to change the value. The value change in steps of 10.
Or,
click in the input field and enter the desired value with the keyboard.

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-37
Deblank image command
19.4.5 ACSAR2
19.4.5.1 Input mode

What can be done ?
When an input module (slot) has different working modes, these modes can be set with the Input Mode
command in a macro.
How to select ?
1. Click on Input mode. (image 19-38)
The right pane shows an overview of the possible inputs.
2. Select the desired input by clicking on the corresponding radio button.
The actual mode will be displayed in the combo box below the selection.
3. Click on the combo box and select the desired mode.

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-38
Input mode selection
19.4.5.2 Input Locking

What can be done?
The output signal can be locked on an internal generated sync signal or on the sync signal of one of the
input sources. Locking the output signal on an input signal can be required if motion artifacts occurs in
that window or if frame delay for that input has to be set to zero.
How to select ?
1. Click on Input Locking. (image 19-39)
The right pane show the possible inputs and shows also if a lock was set or not.
2. To lock to an input, select first the radio button in front of the desired input.
3. Select the radio button in front of Locked.
The output will be locked on the selected input.

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-39
Input locking
If no locking is desired, click on the radio button in front of unlocked.
19.4.6 Automation
19.4.6.1 GPO control

What can be done ?
A function can be associated to a general purpose output.
How to add a function

1. Click on GPO Control. (image 19-40)
The right pane shows a GPO selection box and function box.
2. Click on the drop down box next to Output.
3. Select a GPO out of the list.
4. Click on the drop down box next to Function to associate a function to the selected Output. (im-
age 19-41)
Possible functions:
- Set low
- Set high
- Toggle
- Continuos toggle

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-40
GPO control command
Image 19-41
GPO functions
19.4.7 Error handling
19.4.7.1 Error handling

How to handle errors
1. Click on Error handling. (image 19-42)
The right pane shows the possible error handlings.
2. Click on the radio button next to your choice.
Possible choices :
- Halt macro exception. Indicate as failed.
- Continue macro execution. Indicate as failed.
- Continue macro execution. Indicate as passed.

19. Macro Editor
Image 19-42
Error handling command

19. Macro Editor

20. D-Cine Communicator Log information
20. D-CINE COMMUNICATOR LOG

INFORMATION
20.1 Log information window

Overview
The logging of the D-Cine Communicator register all information about actions, errors and statuses while
D-Cine Communicator is connected to the projector.
Image 20-1
Log view
The following information is given:

• Line number with importance icon in front of it.
• Date and time when the registration happened
• Type of logging
- W = warning
- I = info
- E = error
- F = fatal
• Message
The logging can be sorted by clicking in an item in the title area.
This D-Cine Communicator logging can also be found as file log.txt in the same directory
as those where the program is installed

20. D-Cine Communicator Log information

21. Help Function
21. HELP FUNCTION

Overview
• Introduction
• Using help
21.1 Introduction
How is the help structured
Most items on the tab pages contains online help which will pop up while dragging with the help icon on it.
For the tab pages, the help icon is situated on the right upper corner on the same level of the tab bar.
For the pop up pages, the help icon is situate next to the close icon in the window heading.
21.2 Using help

How to use help
1. Click first on the help icon (indicated with a ?).
icon on the tab pages.
A question mark will be added to the cursor.
2. Drag your cursor over the item for which you want to see help. (image 21-1)
3. Click on that item.
A yellow help pop up window will appear with a short description of the function. (image 21-2)

Help on item Yellow help window

21. Help Function

22. ACSAR 2
22. ACSAR 2
Overview
• General introduction
• Create a new layout
• Edit an existing layout
• Renaming a layout
• Deleting a layout
• Windowing
• Settings
• Input slot configuration
• Input locking
22.1 General introduction

Overview
With the ACSAR 2 it is possible to connect up to four sources which can be mixed to one image. Each
source is displayed in a separate window on which z-ordering is possible. The window size, timings and
other settings can be set up for each source independently.
The result image is internally connected to the projector.
Window
A window represents the active area of an input source.
Layout
A layout is a collection of windows. These windows are placed on a certain position within the
screen.
22.2 Create a new layout

How to create
1. Click on Layout file on the menu bar (1). (image 22-1)
The menu drops down.
2. Select Open(1).
An overview window with the existing layout files will be displayed (2).
3. Select a file out of the list (3) and click Open (4) .
The selected layout will be loaded (5).
4. Change this layout to the desired one.
5. Save this layout into a new file by selecting Layout file → Save as. (image 22-2)
6. Click in the Filename input field and enter a new name for the layout. (image 22-3)
7. Click on Save.

22. ACSAR 2
The new layout will be saved.
Image 22-1
Create new layout
Image 22-2
Save as layout
Image 22-3
22.3 Edit an existing layout

How to edit
1. Click on Layout file on the menu bar.
2. Select Open.
An overview window with the existing layout files will be displayed.

22. ACSAR 2
3. Select the file you want to edit out of the list and click Open.
The selected layout will be loaded.
4. Edit the layout.
5. Save the layout by selecting Layout file → Save. (image 22-4)
The layout will overwrite the exiting one.
Image 22-4
Save layout
22.4 Renaming a layout

How to rename
1. Click on Layout file on the menu bar. (image 22-5)
2. Select Rename(1).
The layout file selection window opens (2).
3. Select the layout file you want to rename (3).
4. Click on Rename (4).
The rename window opens (5).
5. Click in the filename input field (6) and enter a new name for the layout.
6. Click on OK to rename (7).

22. ACSAR 2
Image 22-5
Rename layout file
22.5 Deleting a layout

How to delete
1. Click on Layout file on the menu bar. (image 22-6)
2. Select Delete (1).
The layout file selection window opens (2).
3. Select the layout file you want to delete (3).
4. Click on Delete (4).
The Delete confirmation window opens (5).
5. Click on OK to delete the file (6).
Click on No, cancel this action to interrupt the deletion process.

22. ACSAR 2
Image 22-6
Delete layout
22.6 Windowing
Overview
• Window selection
• Enabling or disabling a Window
• Moving Windows
• Scaling Windows
• Z-order
• Full size
• Aspect Ratio
22.6.1 Window selection
When a certain window is not visible in the layout pane, that means that the window is
disabled.
Each input corresponds with one window in the layout pane.
Using the mouse

1. Move your mouse over the window you want to select.
2. Click with the left mouse button on that window.
The border color changes to yellow. (image 22-7)

22. ACSAR 2
Image 22-7
Select a window
Using the menu bar

1. Click View to pull down the selection menu. (image 22-8)
The input selection menu opens.
2. Select the window (input) your want to activate.
The border color of the selected window in the layout pane changes to yellow.
Image 22-8
Window selection via menu bar
Using the function keys

1. Click on the corresponding function key to activate the window.

22. ACSAR 2
F1 Input 1
F2 Input 2
F3 Input 3
F4 Input 4
The border color of the selected window in the layout pane changes to yellow.
22.6.2 Enabling or disabling a Window

How to disable a window
1. Select the window. (image 22-9)
The border colors will change to yellow
2. Remove the checked symbol next to enable by clicking on it.
The window representation will be removed from the layout pane.
Image 22-9
Disabling a window
How to enable a window

1. Select the window you want to enable via the menu bar or the function keys. (image 22-10)
The window indication changes to that corresponding window and the enable box in not checked.
2. Check the enable box.
The window representation appears in the layout pane.

22. ACSAR 2
Image 22-10
Enabling a window
22.6.3 Moving Windows

Moving via drag and drop
1. Click on the window you want to move. (image 22-11)
The border changes to yellow and the cursor changes to a four arrow cursor.
2. Hold down the mouse button to grab the selected window.
3. Move the window to the required position. The coordinates in the right pane will change accordingly.
Image 22-11
Moving windows
Moving via the coordinates

1. Select the window you want to move.
2. Change the X and Y value indicating the actual start position of the window by clicking on the + or -
keys (image 22-12)
Or,
by entering a new value with the keyboard.

22. ACSAR 2
Image 22-12
Move window via coordinates
22.6.4 Scaling Windows

Scaling via drag and drop
1. Click on the window you want to scale. (image 22-13)
2. Move your cursor to corner.
The cursor changes in a two arrow cursor.
3. Hold down your mouse button and drag the corner to the desired position to down-scale or upscale
the selected window. The coordinates of the selected window will be automatically adjusted in the right
pane.
Image 22-13
Scaling windows via drag and drop
Scaling via the height and width

1. Select first the window you want to scale. (image 22-14)
2. Change the width and height value by pushing the + or - button
Or,
by entering the new values with the keyboard.
Note: The upper left corner is fixed during the scaling.

22. ACSAR 2
Image 22-14
Scaling via Width of Height
22.6.5 Z-order
Z-order
The layer sequence in which windows will be displayed in relation to one another.
How to order
1. Select the window you change the order.
2. Change the Z-value in the right pane by clicking on the + or - button (image 22-15)
Or,
by entering the desired value with the keyboard.
Image 22-15
Z-order
The higher the value, the more the window is in front.
22.6.6 Full size

How to reset to full size
1. Select the window you want to size to full size. (image 22-16)

22. ACSAR 2
2. Click on the full size button. (image 22-17)
The selected window will be reset to the full size of the DMD.
Image 22-16
Select a window to scale
Image 22-17
Reset to full size
22.6.7 Aspect Ratio
Aspect ratio
Relation between the horizontal & vertical dimension in which the window will be displayed,
e.g. 4 by 3 or 16 by 9.
How to change
1. Select the window of which you want to change the aspect ratio.
2. Right click on the selected window and select the desired aspect ratio. (image 22-18)

22. ACSAR 2
Or,
click on the aspect ratio icon and select the desired aspect ratio. (image 22-19)
Possible aspect ratios
- 3/2
- 4/3
- 14/9
- 16/9
- 21/9
- 1.85 flat
- 2.35 scope
- snap to current : fix the current aspect ratio what ever it is.
- none : no fixed aspect ratio
When a fixed aspect ratio is selected, the width and height will be coupled in the value pane. (im-
age 22-20)
Image 22-19
Aspect ratio via button
Aspect ratio via right click Fixed aspect ratio
selected
22.7 Settings
Overview
• Introduction
• Load a file
• Save a file
• Save all file
• Rename a file
• Delete a file
• Auto Load Enabled
• Image Settings
• Input Settings

22. ACSAR 2
22.7.1 Introduction
Overview
With each input source corresponds a source file which contains the settings for this typical source. If
there is not yet a source file available, the system can search for the most fitting file or you can associate
a file yourself. This file can then be edited and saved under a new name.
Types of source files

When opening the list of source files, you will recognize 2 types of source files :
• system source files

• custom source files
The custom source files which have the same name of the system source files are indicated with a index
number between brackets.
22.7.2 Load a file

How to load a file
1. Select a window. (image 22-21)
The input number and the associated file name will be indicated in the settings pain.
2. Click on Input File on the menu bar and select Load [All] (1) or Load [Fit] (1). (image 22-22, im-
age 22-23)
The Open an input file window opens (2).
When the following is selected :
Load file [All] All available files will be displayed in the Open an input file window.
Load file [Fit] Only the best fitting files will be displayed in the Open an input file window.
Or,
push CTRL + L for Load file [Fit] or push CTRL + S for Load file [All].
3. Select the desired file (3) and click on Open (4).
When a system file is selected, the software will ask to create a custom file with the same name, followed
with a next possible index. When OK is selected the settings of the system file will be copied into this
new file. (image 22-24)
The settings of the selected file will be loaded.

22. ACSAR 2
Image 22-21
File association

22. ACSAR 2
Image 22-22
Load file [All]
Image 22-23
Load file [fit]
Image 22-24
Load file message

22. ACSAR 2
22.7.3 Save a file

How to save
1. Click on Input File on the menu bar and select Save. (image 22-25)
The settings of the actual input will be saved.
Image 22-25
Save actual settings
22.7.4 Save all file

How to save all files
1. Click on Input File on the menu bar and select Save all. (image 22-26)
The settings of the 4 active input files which are associated with the 4 inputs will be saved.
Image 22-26
Save all files
22.7.5 Rename a file

How to rename
1. Click on Input File on the menu bar and select Rename (1). (image 22-27)
The Select Input File to rename window opens (2).
2. Select a file (3) and click on Rename (4).
The rename window opens (5).
3. Click in the input field (6) and enter the new file name.
4. Click on OK (7).

22. ACSAR 2
Image 22-27
Rename input file
22.7.6 Delete a file

How to delete
1. Click on Input File on the menu bar and select Delete (1). (image 22-28)
The Select Input File to delete window opens (2).
2. Select an input file (3) and click on Delete (4).
The delete input file confirmation window opens (5).
3. Click Yes to delete.
Image 22-28
Delete input file name

22. ACSAR 2
22.7.7 Auto Load Enabled

What can be done ?
When this function is enabled, the ACSAR 2 will create by itself a new custom file when it detects a relevant
input signal.
How to enable ?
1. Click on Input File on the menu bar and check Auto Load Enabled (1).
A check mark will appear in the box just before the Auto Load Enabled item.
22.7.8 Image Settings

Overview
The following image settings can be adjusted depending on the source type :
• Contrast
• Brightness
• Phase
• Sharpness
• Saturation
When a setting is not adjustable, this setting will be grayed out.
Adjusting via dragging

1. Click on the slider bar of the specific adjustment. (image 22-29)
The complete slider bar will be selected within a rectangle.
2. Move the slider up or down until the desired value for that specific adjustment is reached.
The value below the adjustment will change accordingly.
Image 22-29
Adjusting via dragging
Adjusting via the up and down keys

1. Click on the up or down arrow keys until the desired value is reached.
The value next to the arrow keys will change accordingly.
Adjusting via the input box

1. Click inside the value input box.
22.7.9 Input Settings

How to change
1. Click on the Input settings tab.

22. ACSAR 2
The input settings values will be displayed

2. Click in the input field of a setting and change the value with the keyboard.
Or,
click on the up or down arrow key to change the value.
3. When the source is Interlaced, check the check box in front of Interlaced.
4. Select Single or dual path.
How to find the correct values for the item in the Input File?
Hor. line
Active pixels
Hor. start pixel
Hor. Total pixels
Frame
Active lines
Vert. Start Line
Vert. Total lines
Image 22-30
Input file items
Horizontal Total If the value for "Horizontal Total Pixels" is wrong, sampling mistakes (small
Pixels vertical bars in the projected image) will be seen in the image.
Select "Total" and adjust the pixel quantity. Adjust for zero bars.
hint: if the number of bars increase, adjust in the other direction.
Active Pixels The "Active Pixels" : determine the width of the window on the screen. This value
is normally given in the source specifications. If not, adjust until full image is
displayed (no missing pixels).
Horizontal Start number of pixels between the start of the sync signal and the start of the video
Pixel information.
Vertical Total already filled when an active file is selected to be edited
Lines
Vertical Active number of horizontal lines determining the height of the projected image. This
Lines value is normally given in the specification of the source. If not, adjust until full
image height is displayed (no missing lines)

22. ACSAR 2
Vertical Start Line number of lines between the start of the sync signal and the start of the video
information.
Interlaced this selection is automatically filled out when file has loaded. If the image is wrong
due to mismeasurement, check or leave the check box blank before interlace.
(for interlaced images, 1 frame contains 2 fields).
Horizontal Period already filled in with the correct value when active file.
Horizontal period = Horizontal Total pixels / clock frequency
22.8 Input slot configuration

What can be done ?
Each of the input slots can be configured with the correct setting.
How to configure ?
1. Click on Installation and select Input slots. (image 22-31)
The Input slots configuration menu appears. (image 22-32)
2. Click on the drop down box next to the slot which must be configured.
3. Select the desired configuration.
When all configuration are finished, click on OK.
Image 22-31
Input slots selection
Image 22-32
Input slots configuration
22.9 Input locking

What can be done ?
The output signal can be locked on an internal generated sync signal or on the sync signal of one of the
input sources. Locking the output signal on an input signal can be required if motion artifacts occurs in
that window or if frame delay for that input has to be set to zero.
How to set up?

1. Click on Locking. (image 22-33)
A drop down menu opens with the possible inputs. The locked input is indicated with a check sign.
2. Click on the input on which the output must be locked.
Note: To remove a lock, click on the locked input.

22. ACSAR 2
The lock will be set and the menu disappears.
Image 22-33
Locking input

22. ACSAR 2

A. Updating TI boards
A. UPDATING TI BOARDS
A.1 Installation of the Update Package

How to install?
1. Download the Update package from the Barco Partnerzone and copy this file (.zip format) into a new
directory.
2. Unzip the package file into this directory. (image A-1)
The directory contains:
- An update program file (.exe)
- Software update file (.dlpcinema)
- read me and instruction files (.txt and .doc)
- a configuration files directory containing configuration files.
- a recovery files directory containing recovery files.
- a processor board binary files directory with binary files for the processor board.
- an interface board binary files directory with binary files for the interface board.
- a formatter sub system directory.
Image A-1
Unzipped package file
A.2 Start up the update program

How to start up ?
1. Browse to the installation directory of the TI update software.
2. Double click on DLP Cinema(TM) Firmware Installation Program v2.01(12).exe to start up the update
program.
Note: The version indication in the startup file can be different for other releases.

The start up window will be displayed. (image A-2)
Image A-2
Start up of update program
A.3 Make a connection

A.3.1 Type of connections
Overview
The TI software update can be done in two ways:
• Via a serial connection
• Via an Ethernet connection
A.3.2 Serial connection

Necessary parts
A fully wired straight serial cable

Physical connection
Image A-3
Image A-4
Image A-5
Physical indication of RS232/422 connector on DP100-DP90
Software connection
1. Select first the PC com-port by clicking on the combo box just below PC com-port # (1). (image A-6)
2. Select the baud rate by clicking on the combo box just below Baud Rate (2).
3. Check the radio button in front of Serial Port (3).
The connection will be established. A login message will be displayed. Click OK to continue.
4. Enter the userid and password. (image A-7)

Defaults are:
- User Id: Service
- Password: Heal Thyself
Both are case sensitive.
When correct, the Current Projector Info of the selected projector will be filled out.
Image A-6 Image A-7

Serial connection setup Login window
A.3.3 Ethernet connection

Physical connection
Image A-8
Physical indication of Ethernet connection on DP50
Image A-9
Physical indication of Ethernet connection on DP30

Image A-10
Physical indication of Ethernet connection on DP100-DP90
For DP30 and DP50, a crossed Ethernet cable is necessary.

For DP100-DP90, a crossed or non crossed cable can be used. the projector switched
automatically for the correct cable.
IP address examples
First example
• PC IP Address : 192.168.100.5
• PC Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Second example
• PC IP Address : 10.16.236.100
• PC Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Third example
• PC IP Address : 192.168.200.1
• PC Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Fourth example
• PC IP Address : 192.168.200.1

Software connection
1. Click in the IP address input field and fill out directly the IP address of the projector (1a). (image A-11)
Note: For DP100-DP90, the IP address must be the TI/Cinema IP address. To read out that address,
look for the Cinema IP address via the touch panel or look for the TI IP address via the D-Cine
Communicator software, tab page Projector Configuration.
Or,
click in the host name input field just below the IP address and fill out the host name of the projector to
perform a DNS-lookup (requires the local network to be configured to support this) (1b).
Or,
click on Projector Search (1c).
The projector scans the network and build up a list of available projectors with host name and IP address
(only possible for projectors on the local subnet AND that have Release 5.1 or later installed).
2. Select the desired projector out of the list (1d) and click OK (1e).
The IP address and host name will be filled out.
3. Check the radio button in front of Ethernet Port (2).
The program will prompt the user to login to the projector.
4. Enter the userid and password.
Defaults are:
- UserId: Service
- Password: Heal Thyself
Both are case sensitive.
When correct, the Current Projector Info of the selected projector will be filled out.
Image A-11
Make Ethernet connection

A.4 Installation of the new software release

How to install ?
1. Click on Select Release Installation File (1). (image A-12)
A browser window opens (2).
2. Browse to the directory that contains the Release to be installed.
Note: The release files are indicated as .dlpcinema .
3. Click on the file to select (3) and click Open (4).
Or,
double click on the file (3).
The content of the file will be displayed in Selected release (5) after a validation. A comparison with the
actual loaded software is possible. (image A-13)
4. Click on Start Auto-Install (6).
The verification and installation process will be started. It installs anything that does not exactly match
the release.
It includes also the resetting of the projector and the re-connection to verify the installation.
A success or error dialog box will be displayed when completed.

Image A-12
Select Release file

Image A-13
Start auto-install
CAUTION: Do not reset or switch off the projector during an installation operation. A
reset during some operations may leave the affected board in the projector in a non-
functional state, requiring factory recovery.
In case of failures, always send a copy of this log file to your Barco representative.
CAUTION: Log files are not saved automatically. A Dump log to file has to be done.
A.5 Logging of the operation

What is possible?
The program maintains a log of all operations performed.
To show this log, click on Show Log.

Image A-14
Show logging started
The log window opens.
Image A-15
Log info

By clicking on one of the buttons, the following is possible with the log:
• Dump to file : the log will be dumped into a file on the hard disk. A name and location will be asked
first.
• Clear log : the log will be cleared. All information will be removed.
Log files are not saved automatically to disk. To save the file execute a Dump to file.
A.6 Special functions

Overview
To select a special installation and/or verification function, click on <<Special Operations>>. Before
clicking on Special Operations, a connection to the projector must be present and a release file must be
selected.
Image A-16
Special operations
Auto-Install Cinema Boards Only will only verify and install components related to the Interface
and Processor boards.
Use only if cinema boards are replaced (interface board,
processor board)
Auto-Install Formatter Subsystem will only verify and install components related to the Formatter
Only subsystem.
Use only when the engine was replaced.
Verify Release Only will check all components of a Release supported by this
program. No changes will be made to the projector.

Force Cinema Re-Install will reinstall all Cinema components (Disk-Chip and flash)
whether or not they are up to date. This rarely needed and is
(see note)
intended for special recovery purposes only.
Fill-System Install Only will format the Disk-Chip and install all files (no other flash
components are touched). This is intended for special
(see note)
file-system recovery only.
Note : with these options you will loose all default MACRO, PCF and SCREEN files. These options should
not be used.
A.7 Factory Install Options
CAUTION: Never use these options in the field. Only for factory use.
Overview
These options are intended for factory use for brand new boards.
For special factory-install operations, select Factory Installation >> to open the dialog window to select
the function to perform. Before click on Factory Installation, a connection to the projector must be present
and a release file must be selected.
A.8 Recovery option - Stay in Boot option

Problem
The main software of the interface board can get corrupt when the projector was reset while a software
update was busy. In that case the projector might be in a state where it tries to load the main software
continuously, but it fails as the software is corrupt.
It is possible to force the projector to load only its boot application and not to start its main application.
This is called Stay in Boot.
The Stay in Boot option can be activated only when connected via a Serial connection (RS232/RS422).
How to activate
1. Check Stay in Boot App. (image A-17)
A message will be displayed to indicate that a recovery will take place.
2. Click OK to continue.
When the boot application is successfully started, a message will be displayed. The current projector
info will indicated that the boot application is running.
3. Click on Select Release Installation file and select the release file.
The content of the file will be displayed.
4. Click on Start Auto Install. (image A-18)
The verification and installation process will be started. It installs the ARM_main_app.

Image A-17
Stay in boot mode
Image A-18
Start auto install of ARM application


B. Appendix : File formats used by the D-Cine Premiere
B. APPENDIX : FILE FORMATS USED BY THE D-CINE

PREMIERE
General
This appendix contains the specification of all the file formats that are used by the D-Cine Premiere pro-
jector and that are relevant for post production houses.
Overview
• Projector Configuration File (PCF)
• Active Area - Source Configuration File
• Anti Log Lookup Table file (LUT-AL)
• Color Space Converter File (CSC)
• 3D Lookup Table (LUT-CLUT)
• De Gamma Lookup Table (LUT-DG)
• Target Color Gamut Data File (TCGD)
• Test Pattern TGA™ File
B.1 Projector Configuration File (PCF)

Overview
This file is a file that will be delivered with each movie. It contains all data needed to display a certain
movie as the movie distributor defines it.
The file Data for Version 1 of the PCF file contains:
• PCF Version Information
• Color Space converter Data (CSC)
• Color Correction Data, Target Color Gamut Data (TCGD)
• Source information data, Active Area Data (SOURCE)
• Complex Lookup Tables, 3D Lookup Tables (LUT-CLUT)
• Lookup Tables (LUT-AL)
• De-Gamma Lookup Tables (LUT-DG)
PCF files can be created using of the D-Cine Communicator PCF Editor.
Description
Data Byte Description
1 Version (lsb)
2 Version (msb)
3- 4 Reserved
5-8 LUT-CLUT size (4 bytes)
9-10 LUT-AL size (2 bytes)


11-12 LUT-DG size (2 bytes)
13-14 Reserved
15-16 Reserved
17- 70 CSC data (54 bytes)
70-206 TCGD data (136 bytes)
207-216 SOURCE data (10 bytes)
217-aa LUT-CLUT data (variable)
aa-bb LUT-AL data (variable)
bb-cc LUT-DG data (variable)
B.2 Active Area - Source Configuration File

Overview
This file contains the capture configuration of the data presented to the system. It defines the Active Area.
Background: The active area within a source frame equals the relevant movie information within the movie
stream. E.g. : 1280 x 1024 movie can be mastered in a 1920 x 1080 stream. Only the 1280 x 1024 frame
contains the relevant movie information. In this case, the active area is 1280 x 1024.
Description
1 Number of Columns (lsb)
2 Number of Columns (msb)
3 Number of Rows (lsb)
4 Number of Rows (msb)
5 Number of Columns of offset from center (lsb)
6 Number of Columns of offset from center (msb)
7 Number of Rows of offset from center (lsb)
8 Number of Rows of offset from center (msb)
9 Horizontal to Vertical Aspect ratio (lsb)
10 Horizontal to Vertical Aspect ratio (msb)

Notes
1. Data bytes 1-4 refer to the size of the image (or sub-image) of interest that is to be captured from the
active data of the input data stream.
2. Data bytes 5-8 refer to the offset (if any) of the image of interest with respect to the active data of the
input data stream. The offset value is the difference from the center of the image of interest to the
center of the active data of the input data stream. A negative value moves the capture window of the
image of interest up or to the left, a positive value moves the capture window of the image of interest
down or to the right.
3. Bit order and weighting fro the 2’s complement image offset data.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3
-2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-1
Bit weight definition for Image Offset
4. Data bytes 9-10 refer to the ratio of the image as it is to be presented (ex. 1.85:1).
5. Bit order and weighting for the unsigned aspect ratio data.
2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-2
Bit weight definition for Source Aspect Ratio
6. If the value zero is placed in the Number Of Columns or Number Of Rows, the system will use the
entire active input.
7. If the value zero is placed in the Horizontal To Vertical Aspect Ratio, the system assumes square
pixels, and calculates the aspect ratio based on the active input.
Example: Aspect Ratio = 0, Active input data = 1280 x 1024: Calculated Aspect Ratio = 5/4
8. The system will use the SMALLER of: Incoming Active Data or Number Of Columns/Number of Rows
in the SOURCE command.
9. The cinema processing path makes use of the size, offset, and aspect ratio parameters available in
this command, while the non-Cinema processing path makes use of the size and offset parameters.
B.3 Anti Log Lookup Table file (LUT-AL)

Description
1 Data (lsb)
2 Data (msb)
3 ... n Data

Notes
1. Files can be uploaded using the D-Cine Communicator PCF Editor
2. A LUT-AL file can hold :
- One parametric value that is applied to all three colors as a power law function (one 16-bit value)
(example value = 2.65, therefore function applied to the data is x 2.65 )
- Three parametric values, one for each color applied as a power law function (three 16-bit values –
parametric order is G,R,B)
- One full table of data values that is applied to all three colors (4096, 16-bit values).
- Three full tables of data values, one for each color (12288 16-bit values – table order is G,R,B)
The size of the file is automatically determined by the amount of data that is sent. For example, if
4096 16-bit values are sent to a new file starting from location 0, the system will assume that this
is one table that should be applied to all three colors.
3. Bit order and weighting for the signed parametric values.
2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13

-2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-3
Bit weight definition for Parametric Values for LUT-AL
4. Bit order and weighting for the unsigned LUT-AL data.
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-4
Bit weight definition for LUT-AL
B.4 Color Space Converter File (CSC)

Overview
This file contains the coefficients for the CSC matrix (C1 through C9), plus the input offset coefficients
(Gin offset, Rin offset, and Bin offset), plus the output offset coefficients (Gout offset, Rout offset, and
Bout offset) as well as Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and Hue modifiers.
G C1 C2 C3 G in - Gin offset Gout offset

R = C4 C5 C6 x R in - Rin offset + Rout offset
B C7 C8 C9 B in - Bin offset Bout offset
Image B-5
CSC Color space matrix coefficients
Description
Data Description Data Description Data Description
Byte Byte Byte
1 C1 (lsb) 19 Gin offset (lsb) 37 Green Contrast (lsb)
2 C1 (msb) 20 Gin offset (msb) 38 Green Contrast (msb)
3 C2 (lsb) 21 Rin offset (lsb) 39 Red Contrast (lsb)
4 C2 (msb) 22 Rin offset (msb) 40 Red Contrast (msb)
5 C3 (lsb) 23 Bin offset (lsb) 41 Blue Contrast (lsb)

Data Description Data Description Data Description

Byte Byte Byte
6 C3 (msb) 24 Bin offset (msb) 42 Blue Contrast (msb)
7 C4 (lsb) 25 Gout offset (lsb) 43 Y/Green Saturation
(lsb)
8 C4 (msb) 26 Gout offset (msb) 44 Y/Green Saturation
(msb)
9 C5 (lsb) 27 Rout offset (lsb) 45 C r/Red Saturation
(lsb)
10 C5 (msb) 28 Rout offset (msb) 46 C r/Red Saturation
(msb)
11 C6 (lsb) 29 Bout offset (lsb) 47 C b/Blue Saturation
(lsb)
12 C6 (msb) 30 Bout offset (msb) 48 C b/Blue Saturation
(msb)
13 C7 (lsb) 31 Green Brightness 49 Y/Green Hue (lsb)
(lsb)
14 C7 (msb) 32 Green Brightness 50 Y/Green Hue (msb)
(msb)
15 C8 (lsb) 33 Red Brightness (lsb) 51 C r/Red Hue (lsb)
16 C8 (msb) 34 Red Brightness 52 C r/Red Hue (msb)
(msb)
17 C9 (lsb) 35 Blue Brightness (lsb) 53 C b/Blue Hue (lsb)
18 C9 (msb) 36 Blue Brightness 54 C b/Blue Hue (msb)
(msb)
Notes
1. Files can be uploaded using the D-Cine Communicator PCF Editor.
2. Bit order and weighting for the CSC matrix coefficients (C1 though C9). These coefficients are 16 bit
partially fractional 2’s complement. This results in a range of about + 4.0.
2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13

-2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-6
3. Bit order and weighting for the CSC input offset coefficients (Gin offset, Rin offset, Bin offset) and out-
put offset coefficients (Gout offset, Rout offset, and Bout offset). These coefficients are 16 bit unsigned
fractions (only the top 13 bits are used at this time). This results in a range of about 0 to 1.
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-7

B.5 3D Lookup Table (LUT-CLUT)

Overview
This file contains LUT-CLUT data. This is a 3D Lookup Table
• Operates in Non-linear Space
• 12-bit processing
• Feeds calibrated P7 color space
• Directly implements ICC output profile (12 bit)
Description
1 ... 64 Copyright notice in ASCII
65 Version (lsb)
66 Version (msb)
67 I-LUT Size (lsb)
68 I-LUT Size (msb)
69 C-LUT Size - Green
70 C-LUT Size - Red
71 C-LUT Size - Blue
72 Compression for C-LUT data :
0x00 = uncompressed
0x01 = compression Schema (TBD)
73 ... r I-LUT data
r ... s C-LUT data

Notes
1. Files can be uploaded using the D-Cine Communicator (File Manager). In order to make these values
active, the file must be selected using the Select Active button.
2. The I-LUT portion of the LUT-CLUT file can hold:
- An inferred table from 0 to C-LUT size (a straight line), applied to all three colors : Size = 0
- One full table of data values that is applied to all three color : Size = 8192 (4096 16-bit values)
- Three full tables of data values, one for each color : Size = 24576 (12288 16-bit values – table order
is G,R,B)
3. The header information is to be sent once per file. This applies when the data to be sent exceeds the
65535 length maximum.
4. Bit order and weighting for the unsigned I-LUT data.
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-8
Bit weight definition for I-LUT of LUT-CLUT
5. The C-LUT portion of the LUT-CLUT file is made up of 12 bit data values which are packed in the data
stream in G, R, B order.
6. Bit order and weighting for the 12-bit, unsigned, packed, C-LUT data.
b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-9
Bit weight definition for C-LUT of LUT-CLUT
7. When the data for the C-LUT does not end on a byte boundary (which will happen unless the length
of the data is divisible by 4), the extra undefined bits will be ignored by the hardware.
8. While the C-LUT hardware will support a table of approximately 101*101*101 (1,048,576 lattice points),
a software limit on the C-LUT file size (655,360 bytes) currently limits the table size to 49*49*49. A
future compression feature (not yet available) will allow a full table to be represented in compressed
form in 655,360 bytes.
9. For the C-LUT, the physical memory must be configured to be (4*N) + 1 on each dimension (G, R, and
B). For example, for a table to have a dimension of 16, a table must be created with a size of (4*4) +
1 = 17. Each dimension is considered separately, so a table of 17*33*49 can be implemented.
10. Conceptually, there are 3 tables, each with 3 inputs (RGB) and 1 output (R, G, or B). However, the
file is not structured this way. Instead, the GRB output values are stored together, more like a 3 input
- 3 output structure. The header has entries for G, R, and B CLUT sizes. These define the number
of lattice points in each of the input G, R, B dimensions, respectively. The number of points is equal
to the product of the G, R, and B CLUT sizes. These points form a 3-D cube structure, stored such
that the input G dimension varies the slowest, then R, and the B input dimension varies the fastest.
Each of the lattice points is stored as a packed 36-bit GRB triplet, which represents the output GRB
value at that point. So, the CLUT data consists of a series of packed 36-bit GRB output values, stored
in input GRB (row-major) order. If the total number of points does not add up to an even number of
bytes, the end of the data file must be extended with dummy data to maintain byte alignment. For
the convenience of the user, it may also be extended to maintain word or doubleword alignment. The
extra data is ignored by the projector.
11. The copyright notice is user definable. It could be used for other purposed, such as a string identifying
the file. It is ignored by the projector.

B.6 De Gamma Lookup Table (LUT-DG)

Description
1 Data (lsb)
2 Data (msb)
3 ... n Data
Notes
1. Files can be uploaded using the D-Cine Communicator (File Manager). In order to make these values
active, the file must be selected using the Select Active button.
2. A LUT-DG file can hold :
- One full table of data values that is applied to all three colors. File lengths for this type of file can
be 512,1024,4096, and 8192 bytes.
- Three full tables of data values, one table for each color (table order is G,R,B). File lengths for this
type of file can be 1536, 3072, 6144, 12288, and 24576 bytes.
- One parametric value that is applied to all three colors as a power law function (ex. value = 2.65,
therefore function applied to the data is x2.65 ) . The file length for this type of file is 2 bytes.
- Three parametric values, one for each color applied as a power law function (parametric order is
G,R,B). The file length for this type of file is 6 bytes.
- The system automatically determines how the file values should be used based on the file size.
Example: File with 1024 bytes (= 512 data values) assumes one full table of values to be applied
to all three colors
Example: File with 6 bytes assumes 3 parametric values, one for each color.
- The system will use the data values as appropriate for the TI hardware.
Example: File with one full table of 1024 data values. If hardware supports 1024, all data values
used.
Example: File with one full table of 1024 data values. If hardware supports 512, every other data
value used.
Example: File with one full table of 512 data values. If hardware supports 1024, each data value
used twice.
3. Bit order and weighting for the signed parametric values.
2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13

-2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-10
4. Bit order and weighting for the unsigned LUT-DG data.
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-11
B.7 Target Color Gamut Data File (TCGD)

Overview
This file contains the target color gamut data.

Background: The color coordinates for the projected primary colors must be measured on the screen.
The values can be different than those originally inside the projector due to reflection of the screen or due
to the influence of the glass between the projection booth and the theatre and even the projected colors
are different from setup to setup.
These measured color coordinates are references for the projector and will be entered so that the projector
knows how its colors are projected on the screen. These measured colors are stored into MCGD files.
This reference measuring, together with the delivered color correction file of the film will introduce a color
correction so that the film will be projected with the correct color settings. The color correction data can
be found in this TCGD file.
Description
Data Description Data Byte Description
Byte
1 Green – x (lsb) 33 Yellow – y (lsb)
2 Green – x (msb) 34 Yellow – y (msb)
3 Green – y (lsb) 35 Yellow – Y (gain) (lsb)
4 Green – y (msb) 36 Yellow – Y (gain) (msb)
5 Green – Y (gain) (lsb) 37 White – x (lsb)
6 Green – Y (gain) (msb) 38 White – x (msb)
7 Red – x (lsb) 39 White – y (lsb)
8 Red – x (msb) 40 White – y (msb)
9 Red – y (lsb) 41 White – Y (gain) (lsb)
10 Red – y (msb) 42 White – Y (gain) (msb)
11 Red – Y (gain) (lsb) 43 White_Clip – x (lsb)
12 Red – Y (gain) (msb) 44 White_Clip – x (msb)
13 Blue – x (lsb) 45 White_Clip – y (lsb)
14 Blue – x (msb) 46 White_Clip – y (msb)
15 Blue – y (lsb) 47 White_Clip – Y (lsb)
16 Blue – y (msb) 48 White_Clip – Y (msb)
17 Blue – Y (gain) (lsb) 49 WP_Tol_Box – x 0 (lsb)
18 Blue – Y (gain) (msb) 50 WP_Tol_Box – x 0 (msb)
19 Magenta – x (lsb) 51 WP_Tol_Box – y 0 (lsb)
20 Magenta – x (msb) 52 WP_Tol_Box – y (msb)
21 Magenta – y (lsb) 53 WP_Tol_Box – x 1 (lsb)
22 Magenta – y (msb) 54 WP_Tol_Box – x 1 (msb)
23 Magenta – Y (gain) (lsb) 55 WP_Tol_Box – y 1 (lsb)
24 Magenta – Y (gain) (msb) 56 WP_Tol_Box – y 1 (msb)
25 Cyan – x (lsb) 57 WP_Tol_Box – x 2 (lsb)
26 Cyan – x (msb) 58 WP_Tol_Box – x 2 (msb)

27 Cyan – y (lsb) 59 WP_Tol_Box – y 2 (lsb)

28 Cyan – y (msb) 60 WP_Tol_Box – y 2 (msb)
29 Cyan – Y (gain) (lsb) 61 WP_Tol_Box – x 3 (lsb)
30 Cyan – Y (gain) (msb) 62 WP_Tol_Box – x 3 (msb)
31 Yellow – x (lsb) 63 WP_Tol_Box – y 3 (lsb)
32 Yellow – x (msb) 64 WP_Tol_Box – y 3 (msb)

65 Green Mode
0x00 = Exact Color
0x01 = Reserved
66 Red Mode
0x00 = Exact Color
0x01 = Reserved
67 Blue Mode
0x00 = Exact Color
0x01 = Reserved
68 Magenta Mode
0x00 = Exact Color
0x01 = Reserved
69 Cyan Mode
0x00 = Exact Color
0x01 = Reserved
70 Yellow Mode
0x00 = Exact Color
0x01 = Reserved
71 White Mode
0x00 = Exact Color
0x01 = Reserved
72 White_Clip Mode
0x00 = No White_Clip
0x01 = Use White_Clip
73 ... 136 Copyright notice in ASCII

Notes
1. Files can be uploaded using the D-Cine Communicator PCF Editor.
2. Bit order and weighting for the target color gamut data. These coefficients are 16 bit unsigned frac-
tions. This results in a range of about 0 to 1.
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-12
3. The WP_Tol_Box (White Point Tolerance Box) data describes the four corners of a tolerance box within
which the white point can vary. The corners must be entered in an order such that the lines of the box
do not cross, e.g. clockwise or anti-clockwise. Note that use of the tolerance box can be enabled or
disabled.
4. The luminances (Y) of the colors are normalized to the luminance of white. As an example, if Y of white
is equal to 0.5, the effective luminance of the other color points could range from 0 to approximately 2.
5. Use of the white “Tol_Box” and “White_Clip” functions are mutually exclusive. If both are activated,
the “White_Clip” function will take precedence.
6. The next figure shows the bit order and weighting for the White_Clip “Y” value. These are unsigned
values with a range of about 0 to 2.
0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Image B-13

B.8 Test Pattern TGA™ File

Notes
1. The system supports the TGA™ format as specified in Truevision TGA™, File Format Specification,
V2.0, with the restrictions specified in the next table.
Color Space Bits/Color Sampling Total Bits

w/ alpha5 w/o alpha
RGB 8 4:4:4 32 24
RGB 12 4:4:4 48 36
YC bC r 8 4:4:4 32 24
YC bC r 12 4:4:4 48 36
YC bC r 8 4:2:2 - 16
YC bC r 12 4:2:2 - 24
2. TGA™ Image Type support is limited to Uncompressed True Color and Run Length Encoded True
Color
3. The following TIFF™ Fields are also supported as specified in TIFF™ Specification, Adobe Systems
Inc, Rev 6.0. TIFF™ Fields are to be located in the TGA™ Developer Area, with a single “Mark VII”
Developer Directory entry providing TAG value (54), Byte Offset, and Field Size. TIFF™ data is to be
provided in little-endian byte order.
Field Tag Type # of Values Values Supported

PhotometricInterpreta- 262 Short 1 2 = RGB, 6 = YC bC r
tion
YC bC r Coefficients 529 Rational 3
YC bC r SubSampling 530 Short 2 2,1 = 4:2:2 : 1,1 =

4:4:4
YC bC r Positioning 531 Short 1 2 = cosited
ReferenceBlackWhite 532 Rational 6
4. The system allows a slight modification in the use of the TGA™ Field Image Data (Field 8) and the
Extension Field Scan Line Table (Field 25). Normal usage has the Image Data Field containing all of
the pixels of the image, with each Scan Line Table offset pointing to the start of a unique scan line of
this image data. The TI modification is to allow each Scan Line Table offset to point to the start of any
scan line in the Image Data field, and to allow the Image Data field to contain less than the full size of
image data. This enables, as an example, the capability of specifying only one line of image data, to
be reference over and over by the scan line table.
5. TGA files are limited in size. Maximum file size is 640k bytes.
5. Alpha data is ignored

Glossary
GLOSSARY
292–DUAL
Input A and input B are combined to 1 input. From a complete signal, part is send to input A and the other
part to input B to reach bigger way through.
4:2:2
A commonly used term for a component digital video format. A ratio of sampling frequencies used to
digitize the luminance and color difference components (Y, R-Y, B-Y) of a video signal. It is generally used
as shorthand for ITU-R 601. The term 4:2:2 describes that for every four samples of Y, there are two
samples each of R-Y and B-Y, giving more chrominance bandwidth in relation to luminance compared to
4:1:1 sampling.
4:4:4
Similar to 4:2:2, except that for every four luminance samples, the color channels are also sampled four
times.
ACTIVE
Stores the current state of the projector.
Aspect ratio
Relation between the horizontal & vertical dimension in which the window will be displayed, e.g. 4 by 3 or
16 by 9.
Button Module Settings

Button module settings contains info on which actions are coupled to each button/input. For manual con-
figuration, see Automation tab.
CLO
Constant light output
CSC
Color Space Converter
Default Gateway
A router that serves as an entry point into and exit point out of a network. For example, a local network
(LAN) may need a gateway to connect it to a wide area network (WAN) or to the Internet.
DHCP
Dynamic host configuration protocol. DHCP is a communications protocol that lets network administrators
manage centrally and automate the assignment of IP addresses in an organization’s network. Using the
Internet Protocol, each machine that can connect to the Internet needs a unique IP address. When an
organization sets up its computer users with a connection to the Internet, an IP address must be assigned
to each machine. Without DHCP, the IP address must be entered manually at each computer and, if com-
puters move to another location in another part of the network, a new IP address must be entered. DHCP
lets a network administrator supervise and distribute IP addresses from a central point and automatically
sends a new IP address when a computer is plugged into a different place in the network.

Glossary
DNS server
Computers, Projectors connected to a network are referenced by their IP address. The only problem is
that remembering IP addresses is not easy. If you need to use hundreds of addresses then it will become
impossible to remember them. This is why domain names are created. Internet names (domain and host
names) are just aliases to these IP addresses. When you use an Internet address it is automatically trans-
lated to an IP address. In fact a program or device that translates those Internet names to IP addresses
is called a DNS Server.
DVI-EDID
Digital Visual Interface – Extended Display Identification Data
DVI sources that are reported to the projector via the VESA E-EDID standard. These will be autodetected
and displayed at the source format size, using standard processing.
GPI
General purpose Input/Output
Host name
This is the name that will be returned, along with the IP address in response to the UDP broadcast query
for projectors.
IP
Internet Protocol. The network layer of TCP/IP. Required for communication with the internet.
Layout
A layout is a collection of windows. These windows are placed on a certain position within the screen.
Lut
Look up table
LUT
Lookup table
Macro
Macro files contains a sequence of commands. These commands are typically select Input Source, Ac-
tivate PCF, Activate SCREEN.
MCGD
Measured Color Gamut Data
Metadata
Generally referred to as "data about data" or "data describing other data". More specifically, information
that is considered ancillary to or otherwise directly complementary to the essence. Any information that a
content provider considers useful or of value when associated with the essence being provided.
Native colors
Native colors are the colors without color correction
Null modem cable

An adapter cable or adapter piece to switch the receive and transmit line within a RS232 cable.

Glossary
PCF File
Projector Configuration File. This file is a file that will be delivered with each movie. It contains all data
needed to display a certain movie as it is defined by the movie distributor.
PSTN
PSTN (public switched telephone network) is the world’s collection of interconnected voice-oriented public
telephone networks, both commercial and government-owned.
Screen File
Screen presentation configuration file. This file contains information about resizing, letterboxing, masking
and lens factor.
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers - A global organization, based in the United States,
that sets standards for baseband visual communications. This includes film as well video standards.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol is the protocol governing network management and the monitoring
of network devices and their functions.
Subnet mask
A number that is used to identify a subnetwork so that IP addresses can be shared on a local area network.
TCGD
Target Color Gamut Data. These files defines the Target Color Gamut. For each movie, it is possible
to select a ’Target’ Color Gamut File, which defines the color gamut values for that specific movie. The
TCGD file is part of the PCF file delivered with the movie.
TGA
Targa Bitmap Files
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
Window
A window represents the active area of an input source.
Z-order
The layer sequence in which windows will be displayed in relation to one another.

Glossary

Index
INDEX
Numerics/Symbols 3 - 2 pull down 85
3D settings 91–95 Offset 86
3D controls 95 Re-synchronisation 86
Frame rate 93 SMPTE 291 85
Start up 92 SMPTE field bit 84
Test pattern 94 Start up 84
Automation 209–210, 289
Action List 210
A Create 210
About 3D projection 91 GPO control 289
ACSAR 2 44, 297–301, 303–309, 312–314, 316 Introduction 209
Input locking 316 Automation DP100 213–215
Input slots 316 Activate a macro 214
Configuration 316 Associate macro 214
Introduction 297 Edit macro 215
Layout 297–301 Introduction 213
Create 297 Automation DP90 213–215
Delete 300 Activate a macro 214
Edit 298 Associate macro 214
Rename 299 Edit macro 215
Settings 308–309, 312–314 Introduction 213
Auto load enabled 314
Delete file 313
Image settings 314
B
Input settings 314 Backup 189
Introduction 309 Button module 201
Load file 309 Loading settings 201
Rename file 312
Save all file 312
Save file 312 C
Start up 44 CLO 71, 76, 80–81
Windowing 301, 303–307 for DP100 80
Aspect ratio 307 for DP100 normal mode 81
Disabling 303 for DP100 start up 80
Enabling 303 for DP30 76
Full size 306 for DP50 71
Move 304 for DP90 80
Scale 305 for DP90 normal mode 81
Selection 301 for DP90 start up 80
Z-order 306 CLO for DP30 76
ACTIVE 181–182, 184–185 Start up 76
Read from 185 CLO for DP50 72–73
Save 181 Calibration 73
Select 182 Read out 72
Set 182, 184 Start up 72
Write 184 CLO key 117–118
Write to PC 185 Delete 118
Active actions 181 Enter key 117
Advanced settings 84–90, 98 Color Calibration 167–168
Image settings 87–90, 98 Color 168
Anti log Lut 88 Measuring 168
De-Gamma Lut 89–90 Color correction 167
Image freeze 98 Process steps 167
Image scaling 90 Introduction 167
Start up 87 Color correction 169
Source settings 84–86 Target file 169

Index
Color Correction 169 Active actions 181

Color 169 Backup 189
Install Target file 169 File 179–180
Color Gamut 171 Download 180
Color 171 Upload 179
Verify 171 Internal file system 173–174, 177–178
Color measuring 168 Changing attributes 178
Color space 139 Create new folder 178
Hardware settings 139 Delete 177
Adjustments 139 Navigation 178
Overview 139 Rename 177
Configuration 11 View change 174
Controller software 202 Introduction 173
Updates 202 Macro 188
CSC format 336 Execute 188
Read 186
Files active 186
D Restore 191
DHCP set up 105 Function keys 98
DHCP set up Barco controller 109 Projector setup 98
Dowser 71
DVI standards 45–46
non VESA E-EDID 46 G
VESA E-EDID 45 Getting Access 13
E H
Error counts 163 Help 295
Port 292 163 Introduction 295
Ethernet 17 Use 295
Hardware connection 17 Hostname 104
Ethernet test 159
I
F Image settings 87–90, 98
File 179–180 Anti log Lut 88
Download 180 De-Gamma Lut 89–90
Upload 179 Image freeze 98
File formats 333–336, 338, 340, 344 Image scaling 90
3D LUT 338 Start up 87
Active Area 334 Input / Source 38–39, 41, 44, 46
Anti log LUT 335 ACSAR 2 44
Color Space Converter 336 Start up 44
CSC file 336 Active Area 46
LUT-AL file 335 Set up 46
LUT-CLUT file 338 Aspect ratio 46
LUT-DG 340 Set up 46
LUT-DG file 340 Cine input DP100 41
PCF format 333 Cine input DP90 41
SOURCE file 334 Selection DP100 41
Target color gamut data 340 Selection DP30 39
TCGD file 340 Selection DP50 39
TGA file 344 Selection DP90 41
File manager 173–174, 177–182, 184–186, 188–189,Input control 270–274
191 DVI dual packing 274
ACTIVE 181–182, 184–185 DVI packing 273
Save 181 Processing path 271
Set 182, 184 Select input path 270
Write to PC 185 SMPTE292 dual packing 272

Index
SMPTE292 packing 271 LUT-DG format 340

Input Control 269
Select input 269
Input locking 316 M
ACSAR 2 316 Macro 188
Input slots 316 Execute 188
ACSAR 2 316 Macro editor 265–277, 279–290
Installation 11 ACSAR2 287–288
Software 11 Input locking 288
Interface 33 Input mode 287
Projector Setup 33 Automation 289
Internal file system 173–174, 177–178 GPO control 289
Changing attributes 178 Create new macro 265
Create new folder 178 Edit 266–269
Delete 177 Delete command 267
Navigation 178 Edit attributes 269
Rename 177 Edit values 269
View change 174 Insert command 267
Introduction 9 Order change 268
General 9 Select file 266
Edit items 269
Edit attributes 269
L Edit values 269
Lamp ON/OFF 49 Error handling 290
Lamp settings DP100 121 Input control 269–274
Configuration 121 DVI dual packing 274
Read out 121 DVI packing 273
Run time 121 Processing path 271
Strikes 121 Select input 269
Lamp settings DP30 120 Select input path 270
Configuration 120 SMPTE292 dual packing 272
Read out 120 SMPTE292 packing 271
Remaining run time 120 Output 284–286
Run time 120 Blank image delay 286
Strikes 120 DeBlank image delay 286
Lamp settings DP90 121 Dowser control 285
Configuration 121 Lamp control 284
Read out 121 Preset files 275–277, 279–282
Run time 121 ACSAR 2 input files 281
Strikes 121 ACSAR 2 layout files 280
Lens 51, 53 Activate EXTRA files 277
Adjustment (DP100 and DP90 only) 53 Activate MCGD files 279
Adjustment (DP30 only) 53 Activate PCF files 275
Anamorphic factor 51 Activate SCREEN files 276
Anamorphic lens holder 53 Auto load 282
Calibration 53 Save 265
Lens motor availability 119 Test pattern 283–284
Light output 77–79, 82–83 Disable 284
Calibration 79, 83 Enable 283
Target set up 77–78, 82 Macro file 34
CLO mode 78 Execute 34
CLO mode DP100 82 Macro Shortcuts 38
CLO mode DP90 82 For DP30 38
Normal mode 77 For DP50 38
Log information 293 Masking 64–65, 68
D-Cine Communicator 293 Definition 64
Overview 293 Direct input 68
LUT-AL format 335 Via arrow keys 65
LUT-CLUT format 338 Modem dial up 26

Index
N Luminance 152
Network properties 104–105, 107, 109–110 Remark or copyright notice 157
DHCP set up 105 White clipping mode 156
DHCP set up Barco controller 109 White point normal mode 153
Hostname 104 White point tolerance box 154
Manually set up 107 Target color gamut 148–150, 152–154, 156–157
Manually set up Barco controller 110 Color selection 149
Gain 152
Introduction 148, 150
O Luminance 152
Remark or copyright notice 157
Output 284–286
White clipping mode 156
Blank image delay 286
White point normal mode 153
DeBlank image delay 286
White point tolerance box 154
Dowser control 285
Use of sliders 127
Lamp control 284
Change one color 127
Use of the slider 128–129
P 3 color at once 128
3 values to same level 129
Pattern shortcuts 34
PCF Editor 125–127
PCF editor 123–125, 127–140, 142, 144, 146–150,
Start editing 125–126
152–154, 156–157
From a existing PC file 126
3D LUT 140
From a existing projector file 126
Introduction 140
From a new file 125
Active area 129–132
Use of sliders 127
Introduction 130
PCF editor mode 124
Save settings 132
PCF file 36
Setup 131
Activate 36
SOURCE data 130
PCF file content 123
Anti log LUT 133–135
PCF format 333
Adjusting values 134
Port 292 163
Introduction 133
Error counts 163
LUT-AL 133
Preset files 275–277, 279–282
Save settings 135
ACSAR 2 input files 281
Color space 136–139
ACSAR 2 layout files 280
CSC 137
Activate EXTRA files 277
Hardware settings 138–139
Activate MCGD files 279
Introduction 136
Activate PCF files 275
Matrix values 138
Activate SCREEN files 276
Gamma LUT 142, 144, 146–147
Auto load 282
Adjusting values 146
Projector configuration 50
Gray scale tracking 142
Image orientation 50
Import table 144
Projector Configuration 36, 38–39, 41, 49, 51, 53, 55,
Introduction 142
64–65, 68, 70–71, 76, 80–81, 101–102, 104–105, 107,
LUT-DG 146
109–110, 112, 114–117, 119–121
Save settings 147
CLO 117
Hardware settings 139
Key 117
Save settings 139
Controller 114
Introduction 123–124
GPI configuration 112
PCF editor mode 124
Input / Source 38–39, 41
PCF file content 123
Cine input DP100 41
LUT-CLUT 140
Cine input DP90 41
Introduction 140
Selection DP100 41
Offline mode 125
Selection DP30 39
Online mode 124
Selection DP50 39
P7 color correction data 148–150, 152–154,
Selection DP90 41
156–157
Internal Clock 101
Color selection 149
Set up 101
Gain 152
Lamp Run Time 119
Introduction 148, 150

Index
Configuration 119 Reset 31

Lamp settings DP100 121 Serial port 21, 23, 26
Configuration 121 Loop In / Out 23
Read out 121 Modem dial Up 26
Run time 121 RS232/422 21
Strikes 121 Projector Head 31
Lamp settings DP30 120 Reset 31
Configuration 120 Projector log 236–237, 246–248
Read out 120 Clear 237, 248
Remaining run time 120 Display 236, 247
Run time 120 Refresh 237, 247
Strikes 120 Save 237, 247
Lamp settings DP90 121 Projector Screen Set up 37
Configuration 121 Screen file 37
Read out 121 Projector setup 87, 91–95
Run time 121 Advanced settings 87, 91–95
Strikes 121 3D controls 95
Lens motor availability 119 3D settings 91
Network properties 102, 104–105, 107, 109–110 3D settings frame rate 93
DHCP set up 105 3D settings start up 92
DHCP set up Barco controller 109 3D settings test pattern 94
Ethernet connections 102 About 3D projection 91
Hostname 104 Image settings 87
Manually set up 107 Projector Setup 33, 83–86, 98
Manually set up Barco controller 110 Advanced settings 83–86
Output / Screen 49, 51, 53, 55, 64–65, 68, 70–71, 3 - 2 pull down 85
76, 80–81 Offset 86
Anamorphic lens holder 53 Re-synchronisation 86
CLO for DP100 80 SMPTE 291 85
CLO for DP100 normal mode 81 SMPTE field bit 84
CLO for DP100 start up 80 Source settings 84
CLO for DP30 76 Function keys 98
CLO for DP50 71 Interface 33
CLO for DP90 80 Projector status 251
CLO for DP90 normal mode 81 DP100 251
CLO for DP90 start up 80 DP90 251
Dowser 71 Projector Status 231–233, 235–237, 245–247, 263
Lens Type 51 Active Cooling 237
Masking 64–65, 68 Barco access level 236, 246
Resizing 55 Boards Status 235
Saving 70 CLO 235, 245
PCF file 36 DP50 231
Serial Bus Address 102 External Cooler 235
Set up 102 Fan/Tec Controller 233
Serial Number 115 Overview 231
Read out 115 Projector log 236, 247
Serial Port 114 Display 236, 247
Configuration 114 Security Card Cage 235, 245
SNMP 115–116 Status overview 232
Key 115 Switch Mode Power Supply 232
Settings 116 Version 263
Projector Connection 17–18, 20–21, 23, 26, 30–31 Software 263
Disconnection 30 Projector status DP100 251–252, 254, 256–258, 260
Ethernet 17–18, 20 Certificates 260
Via IP address 18 General overview 251
Via short cuts 20 Projector log 257
Introduction 17 Projector properties 256
Password 30 Security log 258
Change 30 Status overviews 252, 254
Projector Head 31 Fan 254

Index
Temperature 252 Card Cage 208

Voltages 252 Access overview 208
Projector status DP30 248 Overview 205
Security log 248 Pin code 207
Projector Status DP30 241–246 Change 207
Board status 244 Start up 205
DCDC Controller 243 Self test 163, 165
Lamp power supply 243 Choices 165
Lens Info Module 246 Start up 163
Lens Motor Controller 245 Server 219–223, 225–227, 229
Overview 241–242 Interface 220
Projector log 246 Introduction 219
SMPS 242 Metadata control 226–227, 229
Projector status DP50 238, 249 Activation 229
Certificates 238, 249 Introduction 226
Security log 238 Metadata file 227
Projector status DP90 251–252, 254, 256–258, 260 Metadata server 227
Certificates 260 Steps 227
General overview 251 Time to live 229
Projector log 257 Subtitle control 223, 225–226
Projector properties 256 Activation 226
Security log 258 Steps 223
Status overviews 252, 254 Subtitle file 223
Fan 254 Subtitle server 223
Temperature 252 Time to live 225
Voltages 252 Time control 220–222
Projector Tests 159–160, 162–163, 165 Control 222
Ethernet test 159 Input frequency 221
General Purpose Output 159 Time source 220
Port 292 163 Timeline adjustment 222
Error counts 163 Timeline stamp 221
Self test 163, 165 SNMP 116
Choices 165 Settings 116
Start up 163 SNMP key 116
Test Patterns 160, 162 Delete 116
Change 160 Software 11–12, 15
Clear 162 Installation 11
Removing 15
Start up 15
R Via batch file 15
Read 186 Updating 12
Files active 186 SOURCE format 334
Registration 14 Start up 11, 15
Resizing 56, 58, 60 Via a batch file 15
Definition 56
Letterbox 60
Via arrow keys 56 T
Via direct input 58 TCGD format 340
Restore 191 Test Patterns 160, 162
Change 160
Clear 162
S TGA file 344
Saving 70 TI update 320, 322, 325, 327, 329–330
Screen file 70 Connection 320, 322
Screen file 37 Ethernet 322
Activate 37 Serial 320
Security Management 205, 207–208 Factory install options 330
Adding 207 Installation 325
Extra key 207 Logging 327

Index
Special functions 329 Install package 319

Stay in Boot 330 Updates 195–196, 201–203
Time control 220–222 Controller software 202
Control 222 General 196
Input frequency 221 Settings 196
Time source 220 Software 196
Timeline adjustment 222 Individual 201
Timeline stamp 221 Button module 201
Touch panel menu 201 Settings 195
Updates 201 Overview 195
Troubleshooting 203–204 Software 195
Connection broken 203–204 Overview 195
Button control software 204 Touch panel menus 201
Touch panel software 204 Troubleshooting 203
Projector reset 203 Updating 12
Updates 203 Software 12
Upgrade 11
Software 11
U
Update 319
Program 319 V
Start up 319 Version Info 263
TI boards 319

Index

List of images
LIST OF IMAGES
2-1 Licence agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2-2 Install selection window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2-3 Logon screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2-4 Register warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3-1 Metadata enabled message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3-2 Physical indication of Ethernet connector on DP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3-3 Physical indication of Ethernet connector on DP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3-4 Physical indication of Ethernet connectors on DP100 and DP90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3-5 Selecting Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3-6 Primary port selected within an Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3-7 Selecting Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3-8 Logon connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3-9 Available projectors on the Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3-11 Physical indication of RS232/422 connector on DP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3-12 Physical indication of RS232/422 connector on DP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3-13 Physical indication of RS232/422 connector on DP100 and DP90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3-14 Selecting Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3-15 Selecting the communication port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3-17 Physical indication of the Serial Loop in connector on DP50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3-18 Physical indication of the Serial Loop in connector on DP30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3-19 Physical indication of the Serial Loop in connector on DP100 and DP90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3-20 Selecting Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3-21 Selecting the communication port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3-22 Serial bus mode selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3-24 Principle diagram modem connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3-25 Dialup connection selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3-26 Dialup connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3-27 Dial-up connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3-28 Modem Terminal Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3-29 Modem Terminal Window : password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3-30 Take Control via dial-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3-31 Disconnect from D-Cine Premiere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3-32 Disconnect status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3-33 Password menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3-34 Case sensitivity old password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3-35 Confirm password error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3-36 Reset Projector Head message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4-1 Set up interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4-2 Pattern shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4-4 Macro selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4-5 Retrieve Macro files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4-6 Selected macro indicated for DP100 and DP90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4-8 PCF selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4-9 Retrieve PCF files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4-10 Screen selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4-11 Retrieve Screen files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4-12 Macro shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4-13 Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4-14 Source Selection window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4-15 Processing path selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4-16 Cine input selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4-17 Source selection window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4-18 Processing path selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

List of images
4-19 ACSAR 2 selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

4-20 Alternative Content setup window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4-21 Selecting active area for DP30 and DP50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4-22 Selecting active area for DP100 and DP90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4-23 Active Area window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4-24 Width & height indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4-25 Center offset indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4-26 Toggling the lamp ON/OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4-27 Select Image Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4-28 Image orientation set up window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4-29 Lens type selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4-30 Lens Anamorphic factor set up for DP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4-31 Lens Anamorphic factor set up for DP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4-32 Lens Anamorphic factor set up for DP100 and DP90 with motorized lens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4-33 Lens Anamorphic factor set up for DP100 and DP90 with non-motorized lens . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4-34 Anamorphic Lens calibration for DP100/DP90 with motorized lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4-35 Anamorphic Lens calibration for DP100/DP90 with non-motorized lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4-36 End of range blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4-37 Start up Resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4-38 Resizing window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4-39 Short cuts to patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4-40 Resizing indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4-41 Start up Resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4-42 Resizing window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4-45 Example letterboxing enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4-46 Example letterboxing disabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4-47 Masking indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4-48 Start up Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4-49 Masking window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4-51 Masking the corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4-52 Curve masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4-53 Start up Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4-54 Masking window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4-56 Direct masking input corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4-57 Curve factor window for masking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4-58 Save Screen File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4-59 File Selection window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4-60 Input File name window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4-61 Open or close the dowser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4-62 Start up of the CLO functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4-64 CLO window, read selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4-65 CLO read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4-66 Stop reading light output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4-67 Selecting measure now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4-68 Measure CLO message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4-69 Measuring CLO on Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4-70 Select insert measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4-71 Insert value / calibrating message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4-72 Insert value window for measured CLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4-73 Calibration successful message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4-75 Light output / calibration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4-76 Normal mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4-77 Lamp indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4-78 CLO mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4-79 Start calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

List of images
4-80 Calibration message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4-82 Light output / calibration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4-83 Normal mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4-84 Lamp indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4-85 For DP100-DP90, CLO mode selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4-86 Start calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4-87 Calibration message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4-88 Source settings selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4-89 Advanced Settings window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4-90 Advanced settings window : SMPTE field bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4-91 Advanced settings window : SMPTE 291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4-92 Advanced settings window : 3-2 pull down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4-93 Advanced settings window : Re-Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4-94 Advanced settings window : Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4-95 Image settings selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4-96 Advanced Image settings window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4-97 Advanced image settings : anti log Lut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4-98 Anti lut exemple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4-99 Advanced image settings : De-Gamma Lut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4-100 Advanced Image settings : complex Lut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4-101 Advanced Image settings : image scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4-102 Signal flow processing path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4-103 3D settings selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4-104 Advanced 3D settings window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4-105 3D test pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4-106 3D controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4-107 White (Blue) line code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4-108 Relationship of 3D L/R Display Reference and displayed data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4-109 Output reference - displayed data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4-110 Delay example for 3D L/R Output Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4-111 Advanced Image settings : freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4-112 Advanced Image settings : freeze activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5-1 Internal clock set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5-2 Setting the internal clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5-3 Internal clock set message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5-4 Set current PC time as internal clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5-5 Serial Bus Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5-7 Hostname set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5-8 Network properties, TI button selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5-9 Network settings window, DHCP selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5-10 Ethernet state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5-12 Network settings window, manual set up selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5-13 Network properties, Barco controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5-14 Network settings window, Barco controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5-15 Ethernet state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
5-17 Network settings, Barco controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
5-18 Physical position of BD37 connector on DP50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
5-19 Physical position of BD37 connector on DP30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
5-20 Physical position of DB37 connector on DP100-DP90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
5-21 General purpose input selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
5-22 Macro selection menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
5-23 Macro selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
5-24 Macro file filled out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
5-25 Select Configure serial ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
5-26 Serial Port overview window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
5-27 Serial number indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
5-28 SNMP key selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
5-29 SNMP key input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
5-30 SNMP key check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

List of images
5-31 SNMP settings selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

5-32 SNMP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
5-33 Management system server IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
5-34 Selecting CLO key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5-35 CLO key window for DP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5-36 CLO key window for DP30, DP100 and DP90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5-37 CLO key entry check window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5-38 Lens availability selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
5-39 Lens motor availability setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
5-40 Lamp Run Time and Strikes indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
5-41 Changing the values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5-42 Applying new values Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5-43 New lamp values confirmation window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5-44 Settings overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5-45 Lamp reset message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5-46 Select lamp reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5-47 Lamp reset message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5-48 Lamp article number selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5-49 Lamp article number filled out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6-1 Overview projector processing scheme : Cinema processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6-2 Overview projector processing scheme : Non-Cinema processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6-3 PCF Editor tab header online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6-4 Start up offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6-5 PCF Editor tab header offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6-6 New PCF file window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6-7 Browser window on PC file system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6-8 Select one color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6-9 Preview anti log change per color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6-10 Linking colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6-11 Leveling 3 colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6-12 Result leveling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6-13 Active area indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6-14 Processing path : active area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6-15 Active Area File box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6-16 Size adjustment Active area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6-17 Creating an active area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6-18 Center offset indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6-19 Aspect ratio Active area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6-20 Save active area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6-21 Save browser for SOURCE files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6-22 Processing path : Anti Lookup Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6-23 Open an LUT_AL file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6-24 Browser window for LUT-AL files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6-25 Adjusting the values for Anti log LUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6-26 Save settings in separate file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6-27 Browser for saving LUT-AL files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6-28 Overview Color Space convertor tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6-30 Processing path : Color space conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6-31 Opening a CSC file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6-32 Browser for CSC files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6-33 CSC values, direct entering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6-34 CSC values, via scrolling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6-35 Color space sliders overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6-36 Save to separate CSC file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6-37 Save CSC file browser window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6-38 Processing path : Complex 3D lookup table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6-39 Film production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6-40 Processing path : De-Gamma lookup table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6-41 Enable macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

List of images
6-42 Gray scale Excel sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

6-43 Fragment of makelut.txt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6-44 Result graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6-45 Import Gamma Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6-46 Import gamma table window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6-47 Import browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6-48 Imported table created with the excel sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6-49 Open LUT-DG file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6-50 Adjusting Gamma curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6-51 Save to separate LUT–DG file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6-52 Save file browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6-53 Chromaticity diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6-54 Color point selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
6-55 Color coordinate box : cyan selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
6-56 Histogram box : cyan selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
6-57 Coordinate change box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6-58 Coordinate change box : change coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6-59 Coordinate change box : change value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6-60 Gain change via slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6-61 Gain change via up/down arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6-62 Gain change via input value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6-63 White point operation mode: normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6-64 White point coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6-65 Delta value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6-66 Tolerance box and corrected white point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6-67 White point tolerance box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6-68 Chromaticity diagram: white point tolerance box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6-69 White Clipping Mode selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6-70 Chromaticity diagram White Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6-71 Remark / copyright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7-1 Ethernet test : fill out the address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
7-2 Starting the Ethernet test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7-3 Ping successfully. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7-4 Ping fail message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7-5 Change test pattern selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7-6 Retrieving test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7-7 List of test patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7-8 Loading test patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7-9 Test pattern displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7-10 Test pattern shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7-11 Clear test pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7-12 Clear test pattern warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7-13 Removing test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7-14 Error count on port 292 A & B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7-15 Start up Self tests setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7-16 Self test setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8-1 Selecting Measure Color Gamut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8-2 Color Gamut Measurement window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8-3 Color Gamut Measurement Red selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8-4 Loading test pattern message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8-5 Values successfully applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8-6 Selecting Target Color Gamut file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8-7 Retrieving color gamut files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8-8 Overview color gamut files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8-9 Adjust color gamut message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8-10 File active message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8-11 Selecting Target Color Gamut file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8-12 Browser window to TCGD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8-13 Select Verify Color Gamut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8-14 Verify color window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

List of images
8-15 Remove test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

9-1 Default projector file system view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
9-2 File or structure selection window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
9-3 Renaming files and folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
9-4 Rename dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
9-5 Deleting a file or directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
9-6 Delete confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
9-7 Creation of new folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
9-8 New folder pop up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
9-9 Selecting Changing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
9-10 Attribute window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
9-11 Uploading file or files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
9-12 Download file or files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
9-13 Change view internal file system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
9-14 View selection internal file system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9-15 Save from active selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9-16 Message Directory structure view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9-17 Save from Active input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9-18 Change view selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9-19 Select SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9-20 “Select Active” selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9-21 Message Directory structure view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9-22 Select active confirmation window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9-23 Select active successfully . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9-24 Select Change View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
9-25 Select SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
9-26 Write Active Direct selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9-27 Type message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9-28 Directory structure error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9-29 Confirmation of Write Active Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9-30 Success message while writing to ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9-32 Select SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9-33 Select Read from Active. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9-34 Directory structure message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9-35 Input box for file name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9-36 Select Files Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
9-37 Files Active window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
9-40 Execute macro selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9-41 Wrong View message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9-42 Execute Macro Confirmation window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9-43 Successfully executed message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9-44 Backup/Restore selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
9-45 Backup/Restore choice window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
9-46 Backup message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
9-47 Browser on PC file system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
9-48 Backup status, retrieve files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9-49 Backup amount indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9-50 Retrieve status of backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9-51 Backup status ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9-52 Backup/Restore selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9-53 Backup/Restore choice window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9-54 Restore message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9-55 Browser window on file system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9-56 Restore message, amount of files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9-57 Restore message, busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9-58 Restore ready message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9-59 Restore successful message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

List of images
10-1 Starting the update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

10-2 Update manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
10-3 Selecting the update file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
10-4 Hardware version check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
10-5 Update list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
10-6 Update busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
10-7 Update caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
10-8 Update message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
10-9 Message after reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
10-10 Button module upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10-11 Touch panel upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
10-12 Controller software message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
10-13 Update manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
11-1 Card cage Dallas key protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
11-3 Key code window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
11-4 Key code window example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
11-5 Key validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
11-6 Key list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
11-7 Key code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
11-8 Read log security file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
11-9 Card Cage log file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12-1 Automation interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
12-2 Configuration panel action list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
12-3 Output module selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
12-4 Output selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
12-5 Status selection output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
12-6 Macro selection for action list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
13-1 Button configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
13-2 Active button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
13-3 Change macro selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
13-4 Macro selection window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
13-5 Edit selected macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
13-6 Macro editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
14-1 Principal diagram subtitling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
14-2 Overview interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
14-3 Time source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
14-4 Input frequency selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
14-5 Set up timeline stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
14-6 Timeline adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
14-7 Subtitle server address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
14-8 Subtitle file selection start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
14-9 Example of subtitle browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
14-10 Subtitle file : example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
14-11 Time to live setting subtitling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
14-12 Activating Subtitling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
14-13 Metadata server address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
14-14 Metadata file selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
14-15 Example of browser window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
14-16 Example of metadata file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
14-17 Time to live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
15-1 Projector status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
15-2 Projector status SMPS overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
15-3 Projector Status Fan/tec overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
15-4 Fan location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
15-5 Fan Card cage inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
15-6 Fan Card cage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
15-7 Fan Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
15-8 Projector Status Boards Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
15-9 Projector log file selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
15-10 Reading the projector log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

List of images
15-11 Projector Log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

15-12 Save the projector log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
15-13 Refresh the projector log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
15-15 Clear projector log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
15-16 Security log selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
15-18 Certificate selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
16-1 Projector Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
16-2 Projector status SMPS overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
16-3 Projector status Lamp power supply overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
16-4 Projector Status DCDC convertor Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
16-5 Projector Status Boards Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
16-6 Projector Status Lens Motor Controller Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
16-7 Projector log file selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
16-8 Reading the projector log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
16-9 Projector Log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
16-10 Save the projector log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
16-11 Refresh the projector log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
16-13 Clear projector log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
16-14 Security log selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
16-16 Certificate selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
17-1 Projector status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
17-2 Status overview voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
17-3 Status overview temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
17-4 Ambient temperature sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
17-5 Sensors on modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
17-6 Lamp house sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
17-7 Status overview fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
17-8 Cold mirror bottom fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
17-9 Cold mirror top fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
17-10 Fan 1 – 4 elcabox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
17-11 Lamp fan cathode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
17-12 Lamp fan anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
17-13 Start pulse generator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
17-14 Miscellaneous items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
17-15 Waterflow switch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
17-16 Projector log selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
17-17 Projector log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
17-18 Security log selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
17-19 Security log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
17-20 Get certificate file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
18-1 Version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
19-1 Create new macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
19-2 Create new macro message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
19-3 Save macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
19-4 Edit a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
19-5 Macro editor window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
19-6 Delete item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
19-7 Available commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
19-8 Inserting a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
19-9 Insertion result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
19-10 Change macro file list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
19-11 Select input command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
19-12 Select input path command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
19-13 Processing path command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
19-14 SMPTE292 packing command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
19-15 SMPTE292 dual packing command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
19-16 DVI A packing command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
19-17 DVI A packing command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
19-18 Activate File command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

List of images
19-19 Active file selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

19-20 Activate SCREEN File command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
19-21 Active SCREEN file selection list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
19-22 Activate EXTRA File command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
19-23 Active EXTRA file selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
19-24 Activate MCGD file command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
19-25 Activate MCGD file selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
19-26 Activate ACSAR 2 layout file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
19-27 Select layout file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
19-28 Load input file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
19-29 Input file selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
19-30 Auto load file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
19-31 Enable test pattern selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
19-32 Test pattern file selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
19-33 Disable test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
19-34 Lamp control command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
19-35 Dowser control command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
19-36 Black image output command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
19-37 Deblank image command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
19-38 Input mode selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
19-39 Input locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
19-40 GPO control command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
19-41 GPO functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
19-42 Error handling command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
20-1 Log view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
21-1 Help on item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
21-2 Yellow help window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
22-1 Create new layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
22-2 Save as layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
22-4 Save layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
22-5 Rename layout file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
22-6 Delete layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
22-7 Select a window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
22-8 Window selection via menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
22-9 Disabling a window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
22-10 Enabling a window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
22-11 Moving windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
22-12 Move window via coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
22-13 Scaling windows via drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
22-14 Scaling via Width of Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
22-15 Z-order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
22-16 Select a window to scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
22-17 Reset to full size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
22-18 Aspect ratio via right click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
22-19 Aspect ratio via button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
22-20 Fixed aspect ratio selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
22-21 File association. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
22-22 Load file [All] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
22-23 Load file [fit]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
22-24 Load file message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
22-25 Save actual settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
22-26 Save all files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
22-27 Rename input file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
22-28 Delete input file name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
22-29 Adjusting via dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
22-30 Input file items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
22-31 Input slots selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
22-32 Input slots configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
22-33 Locking input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
A-1 Unzipped package file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

List of images
A-2 Start up of update program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

A-3 Physical indication of RS232/422 connector on DP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
A-4 Physical indication of RS232/422 connector on DP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
A-5 Physical indication of RS232/422 connector on DP100-DP90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
A-6 Serial connection setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
A-7 Login window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
A-8 Physical indication of Ethernet connection on DP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
A-9 Physical indication of Ethernet connection on DP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
A-10 Physical indication of Ethernet connection on DP100-DP90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
A-11 Make Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
A-12 Select Release file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
A-13 Start auto-install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
A-14 Show logging started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
A-15 Log info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
A-16 Special operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
A-17 Stay in boot mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
A-18 Start auto install of ARM application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
B-1 Bit weight definition for Image Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
B-2 Bit weight definition for Source Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
B-3 Bit weight definition for Parametric Values for LUT-AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
B-4 Bit weight definition for LUT-AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
B-5 CSC Color space matrix coefficients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
B-8 Bit weight definition for I-LUT of LUT-CLUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
B-9 Bit weight definition for C-LUT of LUT-CLUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Revision Sheet
To:
Barco nv Digital Cinema/Documentation
Noordlaan 5, B-8520 Kuurne
Phone: +32 56.36.84.93, Fax: +32 56.36.88.62
E-mail: service.media_and_entertainment.emea@barco.com, Web: www.barco.com
From:
Date:
Please correct the following points in this documentation (R5976166/10):
page wrong correct
R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

R5976166_10_userguide

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

R5976166_10_userguide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

R5976166_10_userguide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D-Cine Communicator

Software License Agreement

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 1

4.8.9.1 Start up of the CLO functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

2 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

6.1.1 PCF file content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 3

8. Color Calibration ................................................................................167

4 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

14.3.1 Time source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 5

17.2 Status overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

6 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 7

8 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

1.1 General Introduction

Quick and Easy configuration

… And Total Security

About this manual

Info, term definition. General info about the term.

Note, gives extra information about the described subject.

Tip, gives extra advice about the described subject.

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 9

10 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

2. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND START

2.1 Required Configuration

2.2 Installing the Software

Theatre Edition C:\Program Files\BARCO\D-CineCommunicatorTheatre

placed on the desktop .

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 11

2.3 Upgrading the Software

12 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

2.4 Getting access

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 13

It is strongly recommended to change your password after the first logon.

2.5 Registration procedure

14 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

2.6 Removing the D-Cine Communicator software

2.7 Start up of the D-Cine Communicator via a batch file

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 15

16 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

Note when connecting to the D-Cine Premiere

3.2 Ethernet Connection

3.2.1 Hardware connection

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 17

For DP100 and DP90, connect the Ethernet to port 1 or port2.

For DP30 and DP50, a crossed Ethernet cable is necessary.

3.2.2 Ethernet Connection via entering an IP address

18 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

Possible Ethernet connections

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 19

3.2.3 Ethernet connection via short cuts

20 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

3.3 Serial Port Connection

3.3.1 Serial Connection to RS232/422

R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006 21

22 R5976166 D-CINE COMMUNICATOR 11/04/2006

3.3.2 Serial Connection to Loop In / Out